You can
f
ind
y
our handbook on the PEU
G
E
O
T website, under
"P
ersona
l
space
"
.
Re
f
errin
g
to the handbook on-line also
g
ives
y
ou access to the
latest in
f
ormation available, easil
y
identi
f
ied b
y
the bookmark,
associated with this s
y
mbol:
If the "Personal space" function is not available on the PEUGE
O
T
public website
f
or
y
our countr
y
,
y
ou can
f
ind
y
our handbook at the
f
ollowin
g
address:
http://public.servicebox.peu
g
eot.com
The Vehicle documentation link in the home pa
g
e
(
no re
g
istration is
n
eeded
)
,
t
h
e
l
an
g
ua
g
e,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition o
f
y
our handbook appropriate
f
or the date o
f
re
g
istration o
f
y
our vehicle.
S
elect:
You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest
y
in
f
ormation, identi
f
ied by the symbol:
WELCOM
E
The new Expert has been designed to satisfy all your
requirements in terms of practicality, comfort, safety and
aesthetics. In order to get the most out of your vehicle, we
suggest that you take a tour, from the cab to the load space,
with the "Handbook" in front of you.
The handbook presents the operation of the equipment
available on board in detail.
PEUGEOT thanks you for your confidence and wishes you
very happy motoring.
Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment described
in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the
specification for the country in which it was sold.
Please note the following point: the fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT
may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system.
Please note this specific warning. It is advisable to contact a
PEUGEOT dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and
accessories.
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has
the technical information, competence and equipment required,
which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
2
Contents
Re
m
o
t
e
co
ntr
o
l
2
0
K
e
y
2
1
Al
a
rm
2
2
D
oo
r
s
2
4
Instrument
p
anel
2
7
Adjusting the time
2
8
W
arnin
g
lamps
2
9
Fuel
g
au
g
e
3
5
C
oolant
3
5
T
y
re under-inflation detection 3
6
S
ervice indicator
3
7
L
i
g
htin
g
dimmer 3
8
Gea
r
bo
x
es
3
9
Gea
r
s
hi
f
t in
d
i
ca
t
o
r
4
0
Automatic gearbox
4
1
S
teerin
g
wheel ad
j
ustment
4
4
S
tartin
g
and stoppin
g
4
4
C
ontrols for 4
5
li
g
htin
g
4
5
w
i
pers
4
8
C
r
u
i
se
co
ntr
o
l
5
0
Fi
xe
d
s
p
ee
d
li
m
i
ter 5
2
Sp
eed limiter 5
3
H
eatin
g
/
air conditionin
g
,
m
anual 5
6
di
g
ital 5
8
D
emistin
g
and defrostin
g
6
2
Additional heatin
g
6
4
S
eats
6
7
2
-
sea
t
f
r
o
nt
be
n
c
h
6
9
C
ab
f
ittin
g
s
7
1
C
ourtesy lamps
7
4
Toll cards
/
car
p
ark tickets
7
4
Crew cab
7
5
Load space fittin
g
s
7
6
Rear suspension
7
8
M
irrors
8
1
Electric windows
8
3
2
. READY TO
S
ET OFF
20-4
4
4
.
S
AFETY
84-10
3
Pr
ese
nt
a
ti
o
n 4
E
xt
e
ri
o
r
6
S
ittin
g
com
f
ortabl
y
1
1
S
eein
g
clearl
y
1
3
Drivin
g
sa
f
el
y
1
4
C
ab
f
ittings
1
5
Load s
p
ace
1
6
Ve
ntil
a
ti
o
n
1
7
E
co-drivin
g
1
8
1. FAMILIARI
S
ATION
4-19
Parkin
g
brake
8
4
H
azard warnin
g
lamps
8
4
Parkin
g
sensors
8
5
Ho
rn
8
6
E
mer
g
enc
y
b
ra
ki
n
g
ass
i
stanc
e
8
6
Anti-lock braking system
(
AB
S)
8
6
A
S
R and D
SC
8
7
"
Grip control"
8
8
S
eat belts
9
0
Airba
g
s
9
3
Lateral airba
g
s
9
5
F
ront airba
g
s
9
6
D
eact
i
vat
i
n
g
t
h
e passen
g
er
'
s
a
irba
g
9
6
C
hild seats
9
7
R
ecommended seats
10
1
3
. EASE OF USE and
COMFORT 45-83
CONTENT
S
Contents
3
9
. TECHNOLOGY on BOARD
5. ACCE
SS
ORIE
S
104-107
6. CHECK
S
10
8
-11
8
7. QUICK HELP
119-14
1
The "Technology on board"
section presents the new radio/
navigation systems.
Towin
g
a trailer 1
0
4
O
ther accessories 1
0
6
Trade ran
g
e 1
0
7
Openin
g
the bonnet 1
0
8
Diesel en
g
ines 1
0
9
Petrol en
g
ine 1
1
0
L
e
v
e
l
s
1
1
1
C
hecks 1
1
3
F
ue
l
11
6
F
ue
l
cu
t-
o
ff 1
1
7
Diesel primin
g
pump
11
7
B
atter
y
1
1
9
Puncture repair kit 1
2
1
C
han
g
in
g
a wheel 1
2
3
Re
m
o
v
ab
l
e
s
n
o
w
sc
r
ee
n 1
2
7
S
now chains 1
2
8
Chan
g
in
g
a bulb 1
2
9
a fuse 1
3
4
a wiper blade 13
9
Towin
g
the vehicle 1
4
0
8
. TECHNICAL DAT
A
142-150
Dim
e
n
s
i
o
n
s
1
4
2
W
ei
g
hts 1
4
8
Identi
f
ication markin
g
s 15
0
10. VISUAL SEARCH
151-160
Emer
g
enc
y
or assistance
9
.
1
P
eu
g
eot Connect Navi
g
ation
(
RT6
)
9.
3
P
eu
g
eot Connect Sound 9.6
3
WIP: World In PEUGEOT is
the name given to all of the
new equipment of the radio/
navigation range.
The "Visual Search " section
assists you in finding the
controls and functions and their
associated page numbers on
the schematic outlines of the
vehicle (visual index).
Ext
e
ri
o
r 1
5
1
Instruments and controls 1
5
2
Interior
15
4
T
ec
hni
ca
l
da
t
a
- M
a
int
e
n
a
n
ce
15
5
4
PRE
S
ENTATION
Within the chapters, symbols draw your attention to specific
information:
This handbook has been designed to familiarise you with your
new vehicle from the moment you get behind the wheel and to
describe the operating features.
Reading the handbook is made easy with the content consisting
of 10 identified chapters, which can be located by means of a
colour code specific to each one. Its sections cover, by subject, all
of the functions of the vehicle in its most complete specification.
Chapter 8 gives all of the technical data relating to your vehicle.
At the end of the document, diagrams of the outside and inside of
the vehicle will assist you in locating equipment or functions and
page numbers refer you to the relevant section of the handbook.
directs you to the chapter and section which contains detailed
information concerning a function,
indicates important information relating to use of the equipment,
alerts you to the safety of individuals and equipment on board.
5
2a
2b
8
2
3a
3b
7
Exterior
6
7
4
7
8
3a
2b
2
2a
Exterior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
121
85
Rear suspension
Repairing a wheel
Parking sensors
123
Changing a wheel
78
26
25
20
Side-hinged rear doors
Key - Remote control
Sliding side door
Key
: section identification
: page identification
142
Usable dimensions
6
7
6
6
Exterior
8
109
Diesel engines Petrol engine
110
140
Towing eye
Opening the bonnet
Lift the cover located at the foot of the left-
hand seat and pull the release lever upwards.
At the front, unclip the cover by pressing it
at the bottom.
At the rear, unclip the cover using a coin or
the flat part of the towing eye.
108
Partially open the bonnet, lift the safety
catch and raise the bonnet.
Secure the stay in one of the two notches,
according to the height required, to hold the
bonnet open.
Take care when carrying out work under the bonnet.
Refer to "Levels" in section 6 for instructions on the use of fluids.
9
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1. Lighting and direction indicator
control stalk.
2. Instrument panel with screen.
3. Wiper, screenwash, trip computer
control stalk.
4. Gear lever.
5. Ignition.
6. Audio system controls.
7. Driver's airbag, horn.
8. Steering wheel height and reach
adjustment.
9. Headlamp beam adjustment.
10. Cruise control, speed limiter
switches.
11. 12 volt accessory socket
(120 W max), cigarette lighter type.
12. Ashtray.
13. Glove box, auxiliary socket,
passenger's airbag deactivation
switch.
14. "Grip control".
Interior
1
0
CENTRE CONSOLE AND OVERHEAD
STORAGE UNIT
1. Location of controls:
- central locking/unlocking,
- locking/unlocking the load space.
2. Heating and/or air conditioning
controls.
3. Location of the ticket/card storage or
controls:
- deactivation of the DSC,
- deactivation of the interior
protection alarm, alarm LED,
- deactivation of the parking
sensors.
4. Storage compartment.
5. Audio system or storage
compartment.
6. Central adjustable vents.
7. Hazard warning lamps switch.
8. Screen or storage compartment.
9. Courtesy lamp.
10. Passenger's airbag deactivated
warning lamp.
11. Location of the ticket/card storage,
heated seat controls.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
- a centre console with screen: refer
to "Adjusting the date and time" in
section 9,
- a centre console without screen: refer to
"Instruments and controls" in section 2.
Depending on the configuration of your
vehicle, you have either:
3
1
1
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
Driver's seat
SITTING COMFORTABLY
1. Forwards-backwards adjustment.
2. Backrest angle.
3. Cushion height.
4. Lumbar.
5. Head restraint height.
67
2
4
3
3
Interior
12
Seat belts
Steering wheel Electric windows Door mirrors
44
90
83
81
Electric adjustments, electric folding /
unfolding.
Height adjustment.
Fastening.
Adjust the steering wheel for height and
reach.
Manual adjustments.
3
3
7
1
3
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
SEEING CLEARLY
45
Lighting off.
Sidelamps.
Dipped beam headlamps (green).
Main beam headlamps (blue).
Wiper control stalk
2 fast.
1 normal.
I intermittent.
0 off.
È single wipe.
AUTO , press the stalk down.
AUTO, automatic illumination
of headlamps.
Lighting control stalk
48
Changing bulbs
129
In bad weather or in winter, check that the
lamps are not covered with mud or snow.
9
9
3
4
3
9
Interior
14
DRIVING SAFELY
Emergency or assistance call
This easy to use audio system offers a
map of Europe on SD Card, a Bluetooth
telephone connection and the playing of
MP3 / WMA files.
50, 53
Cruise control / Speed limiter
For the cruise control, he vehicle speed must
be higher than 25 mph (40 km/h) with at least
4th gear engaged
For the speed limiter, the minimum vehicle speed
that can be programmed is 20 mph (30 km/h).
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
This system allows an emergency or
assistance call to be sent to the dedicated
PEUGEOT centre.
For more information on the use of this
system, refer to section 9, "Technology on
board".
Peugeot Connect Navigation (RT6)
Fixed speed limiter
52
88
Grip control
This allows the vehicle to make progress in
most conditions of low grip.
3
3 3
1
5
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
Overhead storage unit
73
CAB FITTINGS
Glove box
71 71
Storage compartment
5
3 33
Interior
16
Location for stowing rail
Lashing rings
Interior rack
106
Vertical partition
77 76 76
You are advised to immobilise the load by
securing it firmly using the lashing rings on
the floor.
LOAD SPACE
3
3
1
7
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
Manual controls
Digital controls, with separate driver
and passenger settings
58
56
VENTILATION
Recommended settings
For optimum use of the system, we recommend:
If I require...
Air
distribution
Temperature Air flow
Air
recirculation
AC
Heating -
Cooling
Demisting
Defrosting
Interior
18
ECO-DRIVING
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel
consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently,
change up without waiting and drive by
changing up quite soon. If your vehicle has
the system, the gear shift indicator invites
you to change up; it is displayed in the
instrument panel, follow its instructions.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox,
stay in Drive "D" or Auto "A" , according to
the type of gearbox, without pressing the
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
Control the use of your
electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before
using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
and leave the air vents open.
Switch off the headlamps and front
foglamps when the level of light does not
require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving
off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will
warm up much faster while driving.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
use engine braking rather than the
brake pedal, and press the accelerator
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions and also helps reduce the
background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make
use of the system at speeds above 25 mph
(40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting
your multimedia devices (film, music,
video game...), you will contribute towards
limiting the consumption of electrical
energy, and so of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before
leaving the vehicle.
Remember to make use of equipment
that can help keep the temperature in the
passenger compartment down (sunroof
and window blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it
has automatic digital regulation, as soon
as the desired temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as
possible.
19
Interior
FAMILIARISATIO
N
1
Limit the causes of
excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle;
place the heaviest items in the bottom of
the boot, as close as possible to the rear
seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof
rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof
box in preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after
use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres
and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when
cold, referring to the label in the door
aperture, driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres
on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly
(engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe
the schedule of operations recommended
by the manufacturer.
When refuelling, do not continue after the
third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any
overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see
the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistent average.
2
0
Access
this selectivity of opening between the cab
and the load space; contact a PEUGEOT
dealer.
REMOTE CONTROL
This is confirmed by fixed lighting of the
direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
ACCESS
Unlocking the cab
Press this button once to unlock
your vehicle's cab.
The direction indicators flash twice.
Press this button a second time to unlock
the side door(s) and the rear doors.
This selective door locking function is
active when the vehicle is delivered. At your
request, the dealer network can deactivate
Unlocking the load space
Press this button to unlock all of
the rear doors.
This separation of the locking
of the cab and load space is an
operating security feature. It enables you
to prevent access to the part of the vehicle
from which you are absent.
Central locking
Press this button to lock your
vehicle, cab and rear doors.
The direction indicators flash
once.
If one of the front doors is open or is not
closed correctly, the central locking will not
work.
Deadlocking
If your vehicle is fitted with deadlocking,
a second press on the closed padlock on
the remote control within five seconds after
locking changes the locking to deadlocking.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior
door opening handles inoperative: do not
leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is
deadlocked.
If deadlocking is activated from inside the
vehicle, it will change to normal locking
when the vehicle is started.
Folding / unfolding the key
Press this button to release the
key from its housing.
To fold the key, press the
chromed button then fold the key
into the housing. If you do not press the
button, the mechanism may be damaged.
Good practice
Take care not to allow the remote control to
come into contact with grease, dust, rain or
a damp environment.
A heavy object attached to the key (key
ring, ...) weighing on the shaft of the key in
the switch, may cause a malfunction.
2
1
Access
READY TO SET OFF
2
KEY
This locks and unlocks the doors on the
vehicle, opens and closes the fuel filler cap,
as well as starting and stopping the engine.
REMOTE CONTROL
ELECTRONIC IMMOBILISER
All of the keys contain an electronic
immobiliser device.
This device locks the engine supply system.
It is activated automatically when the key is
removed from the ignition.
After the ignition is switched on, a dialogue
is established between the key and the
electronic immobiliser system.
The metal part of the key must be unfolded
correctly for correct dialogue to take place.
Reinitialising the remote control
Following changing of the remote control
battery or disconnection of the vehicle battery,
the remote control may have to be reinitialised.
Wait at least one minute before using the
remote control.
Insert the key in the ignition switch with the
buttons (padlocks) of the remote control facing
you.
Switch on the ignition.
Press the locking padlock for at least
five seconds within the next ten seconds.
Switch off the ignition.
Wait at least one minute before using the
remote control.
The remote control is now working again.
There is a risk of damage if the replacement
battery is not the correct type.
Use only identical batteries or batteries of an
equivalent type to those recommended by
PEUGEOT dealers.
Do not discard the remote control batteries,
they contain metals which are harmful to the
environment.
Deposit them at a PEUGEOT dealership, or
at an authorised collection point.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
The "battery flat" information is given by an
audible signal, accompanied by a message
in the screen.
To replace the battery, unclip the casing
using a coin at the ring.
If the remote control does not work after the
battery has been changed, reinitialise the
remote control.
If you lose your keys
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the
vehicle's V5 registration document and your
identification document.
A PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve
the key code and the transponder code so
that a replacement key can be ordered.
22
Access
ALARM
If fitted on your vehicle, this provides two
types of protection:
- exterior protection: it sounds if a front/
rear door or the bonnet is opened.
- interior protection: it sounds if
the volume inside the passenger
compartment changes (breaking of
a window or a movement inside the
vehicle).
Good practice
Do not make any modifications to the
electronic immobiliser system.
Operating the remote control, even when it
is in your pocket, may result in involuntary
unlocking of the doors.
The simultaneous use of other high
frequency equipment (mobile telephones,
domestic alarms…), may interfere with the
operation of the remote control temporarily.
The remote control does not operate while
the key is in the ignition, even if the ignition
is off.
If your vehicle is fitted with a separation
partition, the interior protection is not active
in the load space.
Locking the vehicle with complete
alarm
Setting the alarm
-
Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle:
- have the keys memorised by a
PEUGEOT dealer to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only
ones which can start the vehicle.
- Set the alarm within five minutes of
getting out of the vehicle, by locking or
deadlocking using the remote control.
The red LED, located on the centre
console, flashes once per second.
Disarming
- Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or switch on the ignition, the red
LED goes off.
Locking the vehicle with exterior
protection only
If, while you are away from the vehicle, you
wish to leave a window partially open or a
pet inside the vehicle, you should choose
exterior protection only.
- Switch off the ignition.
- In the next ten seconds,
press this button, located on
the centre console, until the
red LED is on continuously.
- Get out of the vehicle.
- Within the next five minutes, set the
alarm by locking or deadlocking using
the remote control (the red LED flashes
once a second).
When leaving the vehicle,
check that the lamps are
off and nothing of value is
visible.
As a safety precaution (with
children on board), remove
the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
2
3
Access
READY TO SET OFF
2
Triggering
The siren sounds, the direction indicators
flash for approximately 30 seconds and the
red LED flashes rapidly.
- To switch it off, insert the key and switch
on the ignition.
When the alarm has been triggered ten
times in succession (when triggered for the
eleventh time) it is deactivated. Repeat the
rules for setting the alarm.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, if the
red LED remains on for ten seconds, this
indicates a malfunction with the siren
connection.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle without alarm
- Insert the key in the lock on the driver's
door and lock it.
Do not set the alarm when washing your
vehicle.
Failure of the remote control
When the alarm is set but the remote control
does not operate:
- Unlock the doors with the key and open
the door. The alarm is triggered.
- Switch on the ignition in the next ten
seconds. The alarm is disarmed.
Automatic setting of the alarm
Depending on the country in which the
vehicle is sold, the alarm is set automatically
approximately 2 minutes after the last door
is closed.
To prevent triggering of the alarm when a
door is opened, it is imperative to press the
remote control unlocking button again.
Do not make any modifications to
the alarm system as this could cause
faults.
24
Access
DOORS
Load space
- comes on if the doors are
locked and from the time the
ignition is switched on.
From the inside
From the outside
Use the remote control to lock/unlock the
vehicle.
Insert the metal part of the key in the lock on
the driver's side if the remote control does
not work.
Cab and load space
The first press permits central
locking of the front and rear
doors, if they are closed.
A second press permits central unlocking of
the vehicle.
The control does not work if the vehicle has
been locked using the remote control or the
key from the outside.
Pressing permits locking/
unlocking of the rear doors from
the cab.
The indicator lamp the control:
Anti-intrusion protection
When the vehicle is started, the system
automatically locks the front doors. When
you reach approximately 6 mph (10 km/h),
the system locks the rear doors.
Activation / deactivation of the function
With the ignition on, a long
press on this button activates or
deactivates the function.
Opening warning lamp
If this warning lamp comes on,
check that the cab doors and
the rear or side doors are closed
correctly.
- flashes if the doors are locked
when stationary with the
engine off,
This selective door locking function is
activated on delivery. At your request, the
dealer network can deactivate this opening
selectivity between the cab and load space;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
The doors can still be opened from the
inside.
Driving with the doors locked may
make access to the cabin more difficult
in an emergency.
2
5
Access
READY TO SET OFF
2
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
If fitted on your vehicle, do not open the left-
hand side door while filling with fuel as you
risk damaging the fuel filler flap.
From the outside
Pull the handle towards you then towards
the rear.
Good practice
Take care not to block the guide space on
the floor to allow the door to slide correctly.
For safety and operation reasons, do not
drive with the sliding side door open.
From the inside
To unlock and open, push the handle
towards the rear. Ensure that the door opens
fully to lock the device at the base of the
door.
Operation in the event of a battery
failure
Front and side passenger doors
In the event of a battery or of the central
locking fault, use the lock to lock the doors
mechanically.
- To open the door and get out of the
vehicle, pull the interior control.
- To lock the door, insert the key in the
lock, located on the edge of the door,
then turn it one eighth of a turn .
Driver's door
- Insert the key in the lock, then turn it to
the right to lock or to the left to unlock.
26
Access
HINGED REAR DOORS
When parked with the rear
doors open to 90°, the doors
mask the rear lamps.
To signal your position to
road users travelling in the
same direction who may
not have noticed that you
have stopped, use a warning
triangle or any other device
stipulated by the legislation
and regulations of your
country.
TAILGATE
From the outside
The two hinged doors open to 90°.
To open, pull the handle towards you then
pull the lever to open the left-hand door.
To close, start with the left-hand door then
close the right-hand door.
Opening to 180°
A retractable check strap system permits
extension of the opening from 90° to 180°.
Disengage the check strap towards you
when the door is partially open.
The check strap will re-attach automatically
on closing.
From the outside
If fitted on your vehicle, locking/unlocking is
via the remote control.
To open, press the control then raise the
tailgate.
A strap is provided to secure the tailgate in
the upper position.
From inside
Emergency control
In the event of a central unlocking operating
fault, this permits unlocking of the tailgate
from the inside.
Fold the rear seats to gain access to the
lock.
Insert a small screwdriver in this opening to
unlock the tailgate.
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Distance recorder in miles / kilometres.
2. Screen.
3. Fuel level, coolant temperature.
4. Rev counter.
5. Instrument panel lighting dimmer.
6. Trip distance recorder / service indicator
zero reset.
Instrument panel screen
- Speed limiter / cruise control.
- Miles / kilometres travelled.
- Service indicator, engine oil level
indicator, total miles / kilometres.
- Presence of water in the Diesel filter.
- Diesel pre-heating.
- Gear shift indicator.
Warning lamp and controls in the
overhead storage unit
- Passenger's airbag deactivated warning
lamp.
- Driver / passenger heated seat controls
(version with 2 front seats).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
28
Instruments and controls
ADJUSTING THE TIME
- turn to the left: 24H or 12H is displayed,
- turn to the right to select 24H or 12H,
- turn to the left to complete the time
adjustment.
After approximately 30 seconds without
any action, the screen returns to the normal
display.
Centre console with screen
The display - time sequence
is linked according to model
(version). The access to the Date
is only active when the model
version offers a date in words.
Centre console without screen
To adjust the time of the clock
on the instrument panel, use the
left-hand button on the instrument
panel then carry out the
operations in the following order:
- turn to the left: the minutes flash,
- turn to the right to increase the minutes
(hold the button to the right for rapid
scrolling),
- turn to the left: the hours flash,
- turn to the right to increase the hours
(hold the button to the right for rapid
scrolling),
To adjust the time indicated in the
screen, refer to the "Adjusting the date
and time" section of chapter 9.
Instrument panel without screen
29
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
WARNING LAMPS
Each time the engine is started: a series of warning lamps comes on applying a check auto-test. They go off again almost immediately.
When the engine is running: the warning lamp becomes a warning if it remains on continuously or flashes. This initial warning may be
accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.
Do not ignore these warnings
Warning lamp is indicates Solution - action
STOP
on, associated
with another
warning
lamp and
accompanied by
a message in
the screen.
major faults linked with the
"Brake fluid level", "Engine oil
pressure and temperature",
"Coolant temperature",
"Electronic brake force
distribution", "Power steering"
and "Under-inflation detection"
warning lamps.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so, park,
switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Parking brake /
Brake fluid
level / EBFD
on.
parking brake applied or not
released correctly.
Releasing the parking brake switches off the warning lamp.
on. low brake fluid level. Top up using a fluid recommended by PEUGEOT.
remains on, even
though the level
is correct and
associated with the
ABS warning lamp.
failure of the electronic brake
force distribution.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so, park,
switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Engine oil
pressure and
temperature
on while driving.
insufficient pressure or
temperature too high.
Park, switch off the ignition and allow to cool. Visually
check the level. Chapter 6, "Levels" section.
remains on,
even though the
level is correct.
major fault. Call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Instruments and controls
Warning lamp is indicates Solution-action
Coolant
temperature
and level
on with needle
in the red zone.
abnormal increase in
temperature.
Park and switch off the ignition then allow to cool.
Visually check the level.
flashing. drop in coolant level.
Chapter 6, "Levels" section. Contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Service
on temporarily. minor faults or warnings.
Consult the warnings log in the display or on the screen.
See chapter 9, "Trip computer" section then "Warnings
log".
Depending on the seriousness of the fault, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
remains on. major faults.
Row 1 seat belt
not fastened
lit then flashing.
the driver or a front passenger
has not fastened his seat belt.
Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
accompanied
by an audible
signal then
remains on.
the vehicle is moving with the
driver or front passenger seat
belt not fastened.
Check that the seat belt is fastened by pulling the strap.
Chapter 4, "Seat belts" section.
The driver must ensure that all passengers have
fastened their seat belt and use it correctly.
31
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
Warning lamp is indicates Solution-action
Front / lateral /
curtain airbag
flashing or
remains on.
failure of an airbag.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop without delay. Chapter 4, "Airbags"
section.
Front
passenger
airbag
deactivated
on.
intentional deactivation of this
airbag in the presence of a
rearwards facing child seat.
Chapter 4, "Airbags-children on board" section.
Low fuel level
on with gauge
needle in the red
zone.
that when it first comes on
approximately 8 litres of fuel
remain.
It is essential to fill the tank to avoid running out of fuel.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, this
could damage the emissions control and injection
systems.
Tank capacity: approximately 80 litres.
remains on each
time the ignition
is switched on.
not enough fuel added.
flashing.
fuel supply cut off following a
serious impact.
Restore the supply. Chapter 6, "Fuel" section.
EOBD emission
control system
flashing or
remains on.
malfunction of the system.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Battery charge
on. fault in the charging circuit.
Check the battery terminals, … Chapter 7, "Battery"
section.
flashing.
placing of the active functions
on standby (economy mode).
Chapter 7, "Battery" section.
remaining on,
in spite of the
checks.
faulty circuit, injection or
ignition malfunction.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
ABS
ESP
32
Instruments and controls
Warning lamp is indicates Solution-action
Power steering on. system malfunction.
The vehicle retains conventional steering without
assistance. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Opening
detection
on and
accompanied by
a message in
the screen.
door not closed correctly.
Check that the cab doors, the rear and side doors and
the bonnet are closed (if your vehicle is fitted with an
alarm).
Rear
suspension
with pneumatic
height
correction
flashing.
abnormal difference between
the detected sill height and the
optimum sill height.
In automatic correction mode: drive slowly (approximately
6 mph (10 km/h)) until the warning lamp goes off.
In manual correction mode: return the sill which is
still at the upper or lower limit to an optimum height.
Chapter 3, "Rear suspension" section.
on when starting
or while driving.
malfunction of the pneumatic
height correction.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
ABS remains on.
malfunction of the anti-lock
braking system.
The vehicle retains conventional braking without
assistance but you are advised to stop. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
DSC
flashing. DSC regulation triggered.
The system optimises drive and permits improvement
of the directional stability of the vehicle. Chapter 4,
"Driving safety" section.
remains on.
system malfunction. E.g.:
under-inflation of the tyres.
E.g. Check the pressure of the tyres. Have them
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
remaining on with
the LED in the
button (on the
dashboard) on.
deactivation of the system at
the request of the driver.
Operation of the system is deactivated.
Reactivation is automatic above 30 mph (50 km/h) or
after pressing the button (on the dashboard).
33
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
Warning lamp is indicates Solution-action
Brake pads on. brake pad wear.
Have the pads replaced by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Dipped beam
headlamps /
Daytime
running lamps
on.
manual selection or automatic
lighting.
Turn the lighting stalk to the second position.
lighting of the dipped beam headlamps
from the time the ignition is switched
on - daytime running lamps.
Depending on the country in which the vehicle is sold.
Chapter 3, "Steering mounted controls" section.
Main beam
headlamps
pulling the stalk towards you. Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Direction
indicators
flashing with
audible signal.
change of direction via the
lighting stalk, to the left of the
steering wheel.
To the Right: control to be pushed upwards.
To the Left: control to be pushed downwards.
Front foglamps on. manual selection.
The foglamps only operate if the sidelamps or dipped
beam headlamps are on.
Rear foglamps on. manual selection.
The foglamps only operate if the sidelamps or dipped
beam headlamps are on. In conditions of normal
visibility, take care to switch them off to avoid any
penalty. "This light is a dazzling red."
Particle
emission filter
on.
a malfunction of the particle
emissions filter (Diesel additive
level, risk of clogging, ...).
Have the filter checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop. Chapter 6, "Checks" section.
34
Instruments and controls
Screen is indicates Solution-action
Cruise control on. cruise control selected.
Manual selection. Chapter 3, "Steering mounted
controls" section.
Speed limiter on. speed limiter selected.
Manual selection. Chapter 3, "Steering mounted
controls" section.
Gear shift
indicat or
on.
a recommendation that is
independent of the traffic
configuration and density.
to reduce fuel consumption, change up on a manual
gearbox.
The driver retains responsibility for following this
indication or not.
Diesel pre-
heating
on.
climatic conditions requiring
pre-heating.
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before operating
the starter.
Particle
emissions filter
on.
a malfunction of the particle
emissions filter (Diesel additive
level, risk of clogging, ...).
Have the filter checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Chapter 6, "Checks" section.
Presence of
water in the
Diesel filter
on and
accompanied by
a message in
the screen.
water in the Diesel filter.
Have the filter bled by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Chapter 6, "Checks" section.
Service
spanner
on.
service due shortly.
Refer to the list of checks in the servicing and warranty
booklet. Have the service carried out by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Time on. adjustment of the time.
Use the left-hand button on the instrument panel.
Chapter 2, at the beginning of the "Instruments and
controls" section.
35
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel level is tested each time the key is
turned to the "running" position.
The gauge is positioned on:
- 1: the fuel tank is full, approximately
80 litres.
- 0: the reserve is now being used, the
warning lamp comes on continuously.
COOLANT TEMPERATURE
The needle is positioned before the red
zone: normal operation.
In arduous conditions of use or hot climatic
conditions, the needle may move close to
the red graduations.
What you should do if the warning lamp
comes on:
- stop immediately, switch off the ignition.
The fan may continue to operate for
a certain time, up to approximately
10 minutes,
- wait for the engine to cool down in order
to check the coolant level and top it up if
necessary.
Refer to the "Fuel" section of chapter 6.
What you should do if the needle enters
the red zone:
Reduce your speed or let the engine run at
idle.
Refer to the "Levels" section of
chapter 6.
The reserve when the warning first comes
on is approximately 8 litres.
As the cooling system is pressurised, follow
this advice in order to avoid any risk of
scalding:
- wait at least one hour after switching off
the engine before carrying out any work,
- unscrew the cap by 1/4 turn to allow the
pressure to drop,
- when the pressure has dropped, check
the level on the expansion bottle,
- if necessary, remove the cap to top up.
If the needle remains in the red zone, have
the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
3
6
Instruments and controls
EMISSIONS CONTROLS
EOBD (European On Board
Diagnosis) is a diagnostics
system which complies with,
among others, the standards
concerning authorised emissions of:
- CO (carbon monoxide),
- HC (unburnt hydrocarbons),
- NOx (nitrous oxides) or particles,
detected by oxygen sensors placed
upstream and downstream of the
catalytic converters.
The driver is warned of any malfunction
of this emission control system by the
illumination of this specific warning lamp in
the instrument panel.
There is a risk of damage to the catalytic
converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
D
ETECTION
Sensors continuously monitor the tyre
pressures and trigger a warning in the event
of under-inflation, a puncture or a fault with
a sensor.
Any anomaly is indicated by visual and
audible information and is accompanied by a
message in the screen.
Deflated tyre
The Service warning lamp comes on.
Following a warning, the under-inflation of
the tyre will not necessarily be visible.
Check the tyre pressure as soon as
possible.
Puncture
The STOP warning lamp comes on.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, avoiding
any sudden movement of the steering wheel
and the brakes.
Make a temporary repair to the tyre using the
puncture repair kit or by fi tting the spare wheel.
Change the damaged wheel, and have the tyre
pressures checked as soon as possible.
Refer to the "Changing a wheel"
section of chapter 7.
If the damaged wheel is replaced by one
without a sensor (for example, the spare
wheel), the message is maintained to indicate
that the pressure of the wheel cannot be
monitored, so providing a reminder that the
damaged wheel with sensor must be repaired.
Sensor(s) fault or not detected
The Service warning lamp comes on.
When changing a wheel or in the event of a
sensor fault, the tyre pressure is no longer
monitored. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop to replace the faulty
sensor(s).
37
Instruments and controls
READY TO SET OFF
2
Operation
A few moments after the ignition has been
switched on, the spanner indicating a
service operation comes on; the display for
the total distance recorder gives (in round
figures) the distance remaining before the
next service.
A few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the oil level is displayed, then the total
distance recorder resumes normal operation
showing the total and trip distances.
Less than 1 000 miles/km before the next
service is due
Each time the ignition is switched on and for a few
seconds, the spanner fl ashes and the number of
miles/kilometres remaining is displayed:
A few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the oil level is displayed, then the total
distance recorder resumes normal operation
and the spanner remains on. This indicates
that a service should be carried out shortly.
The distance remaining before the next
service may be weighted by the time
factor, depending on the type of driving.
More than 1 000 miles/km before the next
service is due
Example: 4 800 miles/km remain before
the next service is due. When the ignition
is switched on and for a few seconds, the
screen shows:
SERVICE INDICATOR
This programmes service intervals according
to the use of the vehicle.
The points at which a service is due are
calculated from the last indicator zero reset.
The point at which a service is due is
determined by two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time which has elapsed since the
last service.
If when changing a tyre, you fit a
wheel not detected by your vehicle
(for example: fitting snow tyres), you must
have the system reinitialised by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The tyre under-inflation detection system
is a driving aid which does not take the
place of vigilance or the responsibility of
the driver.
All repairs and changing of tyres on
a wheel fitted with this system must
be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Good practice
This system does not avoid the need to
have the tyre pressures checked regularly
(including the spare wheel), to ensure that
the dynamic performance of the vehicle
remains at its best and to avoid premature
wear of the tyres, in particular in the case of
heavy loads and high speeds.
Observing the recommended tyre pressures
helps reduce the vehicle's fuel consumption.
The system may temporarily be disturbed by
electro-magnetic emissions on a frequency
close to that used by it.
3
8
Instruments and controls
When the display shows "=0" , release
the button; the spanner disappears.
After this operation, if you wish to disconnect
the battery, lock the vehicle and wait for at
least five minutes, otherwise the zero re-set
will not be registered.
Zero re-set
Your PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop carries out this operation after
each service.
However, if you carry out the service
yourself, the re-set procedure is as follows:
- switch off the ignition,
- press and hold the trip recorder reset
button,
- switch on the ignition.
The display begins a countdown.
Engine oil level indicator
When the ignition is switched on, the engine
oil level is indicated for a few seconds, after
the service information.
Oil level correct
Low oil level
Flashing of "OIL" , linked
with the service warning
lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in the
screen, indicates a low oil level which could
damage the engine.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check
using the dipstick, it is essential that the
level is topped up.
Oil level gauge fault
Flashing of "OIL--"
indicates a malfunction
of the engine oil level
indicator. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The level read will only be correct
if the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more than
30 minutes.
Dipstick
A = maximum, never exceed
this level as a surplus of oil may
damage the engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop without delay.
B = minimum, top up the level via
the oil filler cap, using the grade
of oil suited to your engine.
Trip recorder zero reset
button
With the ignition on, press the
button until the zeros appear.
Lighting dimmer
With the lighting on, press the
button to vary the brightness
of the instruments and
controls. When the lighting
reaches the minimum (or maximum) setting,
release the button then press it again to
increase (or reduce) the brightness.
As soon as the lighting is of the required
brightness, release the button.
Service overdue
With the engine running the spanner
remains on until the service has been
carried out.
Each time the ignition is switched
on and for a few seconds, the
spanner fl ashes and the excess
distance is displayed.
3
9
Gearboxes and steering wheel
READY TO SET OFF
2
Changing into 5
th
or 6
th
gear
Move the gear lever fully to the right to
engage 5
th
or 6
th
gear.
To change gear easily, always depress the
clutch pedal fully.
To prevent the mat from becoming caught
under the pedal:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
When driving, avoid leaving your hand on
the gear knob as the force exerted, even if
slight, may wear the internal components of
the gearbox over time.
GEARBOXES AND STEERING WHEEL
5-speed gearbox 6-speed gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
In the 6-speed configuration, raise the collar
under the gear knob to engage reverse gear.
Never engage reverse gear before the
vehicle is completely stationary.
The lever should be moved slowly to reduce
the noise on engaging reverse gear.
4
0
Gearboxes and steering wheel
GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR
This system allows fuel consumption to be
reduced by suggesting when to change up.
With an electronic gearbox, the system is
only active in Manual mode.
Depending on the driving conditions and the
equipment of your vehicle, the system may
recommend skipping one or more gears.
You can follow this indication without going
through the intermediate gears.
Illumination of this symbol
indicates that the driver can
change up.
The gear engagement recommendations
should not be considered to be compulsory.
This because the configuration of the
road, the traffic density and safety remain
determining factors when choosing the
best gear. Therefore, the driver remains
responsible for deciding whether or not to
follow the advice given by the system.
This system cannot be deactivated.
On vehicles with a manual gearbox,
the arrow may be accompanied by the
recommended gear.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendations according to the driving
conditions (slope, load, ...) and demands
from the driver (for power, acceleration,
braking, ...).
The system never recommends engaging
first gear or reverse, or changing down.
4
1
Gearboxes and steering wheel
READY TO SET OFF
2
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
Selecting positions
- Move the lever select a position.
Once the position is selected, the
corresponding indicator lamp appears in
the instrument panel screen.
Park: position of the lever for
parking.
To immobilise the vehicle or start
the engine.
Reverse: position of the lever for
reverse gear.
To reverse the vehicle.
Neutral: position of the lever for
neutral.
To park the vehicle (parking brake
on) and start the engine.
Drive: position of the lever for
driving.
To move the vehicle forwards in
automatic mode.
Manual: selection of the gears by
pushing or pulling the gear lever
(+ or -).
To move the vehicle forwards in
manual mode.
42
Gearboxes and steering wheel
Moving off
With the engine running, to move off from
position P .
For immediate maximum acceleration
without touching the gear lever,
depress the accelerator pedal to the
extent of its travel, passing the point of
resistance (kickdown). The gearbox will
automatically change down or maintain the
gear selected until maximum engine speed
is reached.
On a descent, the gearbox will automatically
change down in order to provide efficient
engine braking and good pickup.
If you take your foot off the accelerator
suddenly, the gearbox will not change to a
higher gear for reasons of safety.
When stationary with the gear lever in
position D (drive), a vibration limiting device
is activated by pressing the brake pedal.
- gradually release the
pressure on the brake pedal;
the vehicle then moves off.
- Press the brake pedal to
come out of position P ,
- select position R or D ,
- gradually release the
pressure on the brake pedal;
the vehicle then moves off.
You can also move off from position N .
- With your foot on
the brake, release
the parking brake,
- select position R , D or M ,
- Select position D .
The gearbox always selects the most
suitable gear taking account of the following:
- the style of driving,
- the road profile,
- the vehicle load.
The gearbox is then operating in auto-
adaptive mode, without any action on your
part.
Reverse gear
- Select position R , with the
vehicle stationary and the
engine at idle.
Stopping the vehicle, starting the
engine
- Select position P to
immobilise the vehicle or
to start the engine , with the
parking brake on or off.
If the battery is flat and the gear lever
is in position P , it will be impossible to
change to another position.
- You can also select position N
to park or to start the
engine , with the parking
brake on.
If position N is engaged inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to return
to idle before engaging position D to restore
drive.
4
3
Gearboxes and steering wheel
READY TO SET OFF
2
Manual mode
Manual sequential gear changing.
- Select gear lever position M ,
- push the gear lever towards the + sign
to change up, from 1 through to 6,
In manual mode, it is only possible to
change from one gear to another if the
vehicle speed and engine speed permit.
If they do not, the vehicle will operate
temporarily in automatic mode.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox automatically
selects first gear.
- conversely, push the gear lever towards
the - sign to change down.
You can change from position D
(automatic mode) to position M
(manual mode) at any time.
Good practice
Never select position N when the vehicle is
moving.
Never select positions P or R unless the
vehicle is stationary.
Never change between positions to optimise
braking on a slippery surface.
There is a risk of damage to the gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time,
- if you force the gear lever from
position P to another position in the
event of a battery failure.
When the engine is at idle, brakes not
applied, if position R , D or M is selected the
vehicle moves even without the accelerator
being pressed.
For this reason, do not leave children
unsupervised inside the vehicle, with the
engine running .
Operating fault
Any operating fault is indicated by an
audible signal, accompanied by the
message "Automatic gear fault" in the
screen.
In this situation the gearbox operates in
downgrade mode (locked in 3rd gear). You
may feel a substantial knock when changing
from P to R and from N to R (this will not
cause any damage to the gearbox).
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), keeping
within the limit of local speed restrictions.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
44
Gearboxes and steering wheel
STARTING AND STOPPING
Key
Take care to prevent the key from coming
into contact with grease, dust, rain or a
damp environment.
A heavy object attached to the key (key
ring, ...) weighing the key down in the
ignition switch may cause a malfunction.
Good practice when starting
Door or bonnet open warning lamp
If this comes on, a door or the
bonnet is not closed correctly, check!
Diesel pre-heating warning lamp
If the temperature is high
enough, the warning lamp comes
on for less than one second, you
can start without waiting.
In cold weather, wait for this warning lamp
to go off then operate the starter (Starting
position) until the engine starts.
Good practice when stopping
Minimise engine and gearbox wear
When switching off the ignition, let the
engine run for a few seconds to allow the
turbocharger (Diesel engine) to return to
idle.
Do not press the accelerator when switching
off the ignition.
There is no need to engage a gear after
parking the vehicle.
Running and accessories position.
To unlock the steering, turn the steering
wheel gently while turning the key, without
forcing. In this position, certain accessories
can be used.
Starting position.
The starter is operated, the engine turns
over, release the key.
STOP position: steering lock.
The ignition is off. Turn the steering wheel
until the steering locks. Remove the key.
STEERING WHEEL HEIGHT AND
REACH ADJUSTMENT
When the vehicle is stationary, release the
steering wheel adjustment mechanism by
lowering the lever.
Adjust the steering wheel for height and
reach, then lock the adjustment mechanism
by pushing the lever fully upwards.
Starting and stopping
45
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Dipped beam/main beam change
Pull the stalk full
y
towards
y
ou.
A
utomatic illumination of headlam
p
s
if
y
our vehicle is fi tted with a
su
n
shi
n
e
se
n
so
r.
Li
g
htin
g
o
ff
Dipped beam
(g
reen
)
Main beam
(
blue
)
DIRECTION INDICATORS
(
flashin
g
indicators
)
S
TEERING MOUNTED CONTROL
S
Checkin
g
b
y
means of the indicator
l
amps
i
n t
h
e
i
nstrument pane
l
i
s
desc
ri
bed
in th
e
"In
s
tr
u
m
e
nt
s
a
n
d
c
ontrols" section of cha
p
ter 2.
S
idelamps
Lighting-on audible warning
When the ignition is switched o
ff
, when the
driver's door is o
p
ened, there is an audible
warnin
g
if
y
ou have left the vehicle's li
g
htin
g
on.
L
ef
t
:
d
ownwar
d
s pass
i
n
g
the point o
f
resistance.
Right
: upwar
d
s pass
i
n
g
the point o
f
resistance.
LIGHTING CONTROL
Front and rear lam
p
s
Selection is b
y
turnin
g
rin
g
A
.
46
Steerin
g
mounted controls
Front
f
o
g
lamps
(g
reen
)
and rear fo
g
lamps
(
amber,
2nd rotation o
f
the rin
g
f
orwards
)
.
T
o
s
wit
c
h
off
th
e
f
r
o
nt
a
n
d
r
ea
r
f
o
g
lamps, turn the rin
g
rearwards twice
in
success
i
o
n.
I
n c
l
ear weat
h
er or
i
n ra
i
n,
b
ot
h
d
a
y
and ni
g
ht, rear
f
o
g
lamps dazzle and
their use is prohibited.
Do not for
g
et to switch them off when the
y
a
re no
l
on
g
er nee
d
e
d
.
Automatic illumination of the headlamps
s
witches o
ff
the rear
f
o
g
lamps, but the
f
ront
f
o
g
lamps remain on.
D
a
y
t
i
me runn
i
n
g
l
amps
Dependin
g
on the countr
y
in which the vehicle
is sold, the vehicle ma
y
be equipped with
d
a
y
t
i
me runn
i
n
g
l
amps.
Th
e
di
ppe
d
h
ea
dl
amps
co
m
e
o
n wh
e
n th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
i
s
s
t
a
rt
ed
.
Th
e
in
s
tr
u
m
e
nt
s
a
n
d
co
ntr
o
l
s
(
instrument panel, screen, air
c
onditionin
g
control panel, ...
)
are onl
y
illuminated on switchin
g
to the automatic
illumination of headlam
p
s mode or when the
l
amps are sw
i
tc
h
e
d
on manua
lly
.
Front and rear fo
g
lamps
Rotate rin
g
B
fo
rw
a
r
ds
t
o
s
wit
c
h
o
n
a
n
d
rea
rw
a
r
ds
t
o
s
wit
c
h
o
ff. Th
e
s
t
a
t
us
i
s
c
on
f
irmed b
y
the warnin
g
lamp in the
instrument panel.
These operate with the sidelamps and the
di
pp
ed beam headlam
p
s.
Front
f
o
g
lamps
(g
reen,
1st rotation o
f
the rin
g
f
orwards
)
.
Thi
s warn
i
n
g
l
amp comes on
i
n
the instrument panel.
47
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Automatic illumination of headlamps
Activation
Turn the ring to the
A
UTO position. The
a
ctivation of this function is accompanied b
y
a
messa
g
e
i
n t
h
e screen.
If the sunshine sensor does not function
c
orrectl
y
, the li
g
htin
g
comes on accompanied
by
t
h
e serv
i
ce warn
i
n
g
l
amp, an au
dibl
e s
ig
na
l
a
nd a messa
g
e in the screen.
C
ontact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer or a quali
f
ied
workshop.
HEADLAMP BEAM
Dependin
g
on the load in
y
our vehicle, the
beam settin
g
must be ad
j
usted.
0 - N
o
l
oad
.
1 - P
a
rti
a
l l
oad
.
2 - Avera
g
e load.
3
-
Ma
x
i
m
u
m
au
t
ho
r
ised
load
.
D
o
n
o
t
co
v
e
r th
e
su
n
s
hin
e
se
n
so
r
located on the windscreen, behind
th
e
mirr
o
r. It i
s
used
fo
r th
e
au
t
o
m
a
ti
c
illumination o
f
headlamps and
f
or the
automatic rain sensitive wipers.
The sidelam
p
s and di
pp
ed
b
eam
h
ea
dl
amps sw
i
tc
h
on automaticall
y
i
f
the li
g
ht
is poor, or durin
g
operation
of the windscreen wipers. The
y
switch off as
s
oon as the li
g
ht becomes bri
g
ht enou
g
h or
the windscreen wi
p
ers sto
p
.
This
f
unction is not compatible with the
da
y
time runnin
g
lamps.
Deactivation
Turn the ring
f
orwards or rearwards. The
deactivation of this function is accom
p
anied
by
a messa
g
e
i
n t
h
e screen.
The function is deactivated temporaril
y
when
y
ou use t
h
e manua
l
ligh
t
i
n
g
contro
l
sta
lk
.
Initial settin
g
is position 0
.
In
f
o
ggy
weather or in snow, the
s
unshine sensor ma
y
detect sufficient
ligh
t.
A
s a consequence, t
h
e
ligh
t
i
n
g
w
ill
not
c
ome on automaticall
y
. I
f
necessar
y
,
y
ou
m
ust switch on the di
pp
ed beam headlam
p
s
m
anua
lly
.
Travelling abroad
I
f
usin
g
y
our vehicle in a countr
y
that drives on the other side of the road,
t
h
e
h
ea
dl
amps must
b
e a
dj
uste
d
to avo
id
dazzlin
g
on-comin
g
drivers.
C
ontact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer or a quali
f
ied
worksho
p
.
48
Steerin
g
mounted controls
WINDSCREEN WIPER STALK
M
anua
l
w
i
n
d
screen w
ip
ers
2 Fast wipe (heavy rain).
1 Normal wipe (moderate rain).
l Intermittent wipe.
0 Off.
È Single wipe
(press downwards).
Do not cover the rain sensor,
l
oca
t
ed
in th
e
ce
ntr
e
o
f th
e
w
i
n
d
screen,
b
e
hi
n
d
t
h
e m
i
rror.
Wash-wi
p
e and headlam
p
wash
Pull the stalk towards you, the wash-wipe
is accompanied b
y
a timed sweep of the
w
i
pers.
The headlam
p
wash is linked with the wash-
wipe, it is tri
gg
ered i
f
the dipped headlamps
are
on
.
In the I ntermittent position, the wipin
g
speed
is in
p
ro
p
ortion to the vehicle s
p
eed.
To to
p
u
p
the levels, refer to the
"Levels" section of chapter 6.
I
n t
he
A
UTO pos
i
t
i
on, t
h
e w
i
n
d
screen w
i
pers
operate automaticall
y
and adapt their speed
to the intensit
y
of the rainfall.
Wh
e
n n
o
t in AUTO mode,
f
or the other
p
ositions, refer to the manual windscreen
w
i
pers sect
i
on.
Whenever the ignition has been switched
off for more than one minute, with the
windscreen wiper stalk in position 2, 1 or I,
th
e
s
t
a
lk m
us
t
be
r
eac
tiv
a
t
ed
:
- move the stalk to any position,
- then move it back to the required
position.
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wi
p
ers
49
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
S
p
ecial
p
osition of the windscreen
wi
p
ers
In the minute
f
ollowin
g
switchin
g
o
ff
o
f
the
i
g
nition, an
y
action on the stalk positions the
wipers a
g
ainst the windscreen upri
g
hts.
This action enables
y
ou to position the
wiper blades
f
or winter parkin
g
, cleanin
g
or
replacement.
Re
f
er to the "
C
han
g
in
g
a windscreen
wi
p
er blade" section of cha
p
ter 7.
When using an automatic car wash,
s
witch off the i
g
nition to avoid
tr
igg
er
i
n
g
t
h
e automat
i
c w
i
p
i
n
g
.
In winter, it is advisable to wait for the
windscreen to completel
y
clear o
f
ice be
f
ore
operatin
g
automatic wipe.
R
ear w
i
per
Turn the rin
g
to the
f
irst position.
Rear screenwash
Turn the rin
g
past the first
pos
i
t
i
on: t
h
e rear screenwas
h
then the rear wiper operates
f
or a
f
ixed time.
In winter, in the event of a considerable
amount o
f
snow or ice, switch on the
hea
t
ed
r
ea
r
sc
r
ee
n.
O
n
ce
th
e
sc
r
ee
n i
s
c
lear, remove the snow or ice which has
accumu
l
ate
d
on t
h
e rear w
i
per
bl
a
d
e.
Y
ou
c
an then operate the rear windscreen wiper.
T
o par
k
t
h
e w
i
pers
i
n t
h
e
i
r norma
l
pos
i
t
i
on
af
ter this has been done, switch on the
i
g
nition and move the stalk.
Activation
Pr
ess
th
e
co
ntr
o
l
do
wnw
a
r
ds
. A
c
tiv
a
ti
o
n
of
th
e
function is accompanied b
y
a messa
g
e in the
screen
.
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wi
p
ers
f
unction must be reactivated b
y
pressin
g
the
s
talk downwards, i
f
the i
g
nition has been
s
wit
c
h
ed
o
ff f
o
r m
o
r
e
th
a
n
o
n
e
min
u
t
e
.
Deactivation / Switching off
Place the windscreen wipers stalk in
p
osition
I
,
1
or
2
. D
eac
tiv
a
ti
o
n
o
f th
e
f
u
n
c
ti
o
n
i
s accompan
i
e
d
by
a messa
g
e
i
n t
h
e screen.
In th
e
e
v
e
nt
of
m
a
l
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
of
th
e
au
t
o
m
a
ti
c
windscreen wipers, the windscreen wipers
w
ill
operate
i
n
i
nterm
i
ttent mo
d
e.
Contact a PEUGE
O
T dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
50
Steerin
g
mounted controls
CRUISE CONTROL "CRUISE"
In order
f
or it to be pro
g
rammed or activated,
the vehicle speed must be
g
reater than 25 mph
(
40 km
/
h
)
with at least 4th
g
ear en
g
a
g
ed.
Function selected,
displa
y
of the "Cruise
Control" s
y
mbol.
Function deactivated,
OFF
(
example at 65 mph
(
107 km/h
))
.
F
u
n
c
ti
o
n
ac
tiv
a
t
ed
(
example at 65 mph
(
107 km
/
h
))
.
Vehicle speed above
(
e.
g
. 73 mph
(
118 km/h
))
,
the pro
g
rammed speed
is displa
y
ed flashin
g
.
O
perating
f
ault detected,
OFF - th
e
das
h
es
f
l
as
h.
Thi
s
c
r
u
i
se
co
ntr
o
l
s
h
o
w
s
th
e
f
u
n
c
ti
o
n
s
e
l
ect
i
on status
i
n t
h
e
i
nstrument pane
l
an
d
displa
y
s the pro
g
rammed speed:
"This is the speed at which the driver wishes
t
o
d
riv
e
".
This aid to drivin
g
in
f
ree-
f
lowin
g
tra
ff
ic
e
nables the vehicle to maintain the speed
p
ro
g
ramme
d
by
t
h
e
d
r
i
ver, un
l
ess a steep
g
radient makes this impossible.
5
1
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Selectin
g
the function
- Place the switch in the CRUISE position.
The cruise control is selected but is
not yet active and no speed has been
programmed.
First activation/
p
ro
g
ramm
i
n
g
a spee
d
- Reach the chosen
speed by pressing the
accelerator.
- Press the SET - or
SET + button.
This pro
g
rammes
/
activates the re
f
erence
sp
eed and the vehicle will maintain this
s
pee
d
.
T
emporar
ily
excee
di
n
g
t
h
e spee
d
It is possible to
a
ccelerat
e
a
n
d
d
riv
e
momentaril
y
at a speed
g
reater than the
pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
.
Th
e va
l
ue pro
g
ramme
d
f
l
as
h
es
.
Wh
en t
h
e acce
l
erator pe
d
a
l
i
s re
l
ease
d
, t
h
e
vehicle will return to the pro
g
rammed speed.
R
eact
i
vat
i
on
- Following deactivation of the cruise
control, press this button.
Y
ou
r v
e
hi
c
l
e
will r
e
t
u
rn t
o
th
e
l
as
t
p
ro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
.
A
lternativel
y
,
y
ou can repeat the "first
activation" procedure.
Deactivation
(
off
)
- Press this button or the
brake or clutch pedal.
Chan
g
in
g
the
pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
Th
e
r
e
a
r
e
tw
o
m
e
th
ods
of
memorisin
g
a speed hi
g
her
t
h
an t
h
e prev
i
ous one:
Wi
t
h
out us
i
n
g
t
h
e acce
l
erator:
- press the Set + button.
A brief press increases the speed b
y
1 mph
(
km/h
)
.
A maintained press increases the speed in steps o
f
5
mph
(
km/h
)
.
52
Steerin
g
mounted controls
Switchin
g
the function off
- Place the dial in position 0 or switch off
the ignition to switch everything off.
Good
p
ractice
When chan
g
in
g
the pro
g
rammed re
f
erence
s
peed b
y
means o
f
a maintained press,
pa
y
attention as the speed can increase or
d
ecrease rap
idly
.
D
o not use t
h
e cru
i
se contro
l
on s
li
pper
y
roads or in heav
y
tra
ffi
c.
In the event o
f
a steep slope, the cruise
c
ontrol cannot
p
revent the vehicle
f
rom
exceedin
g
the pro
g
rammed speed.
In an
y
event, the cruise control cannot
rep
l
ace t
h
e nee
d
to o
b
serve t
h
e spee
d
li
m
i
ts,
nor can it replace the need
f
or vi
g
ilance and
responsibilit
y
on the part of the driver.
It is advisable to leave
y
our feet near the
pe
d
a
l
s.
To avoid an
y
j
ammin
g
under the pedals:
- ensure that the mat and its fi xings on the
fl oor are positioned correctly,
- never place one mat on top of another.
Cancellin
g
the pro
g
rammed
reference s
p
eed
When the vehicle becomes stationar
y
, afte
r
s
witching o
ff
the ignition, the system no
lon
g
er memorises a speed.
Usin
g
the accelerator:
- exceed the memorised speed until the
speed required is reached,
- press the Set + or Set - button.
To memorise a speed lower than the
p
revious one:
- press the Set - button.
A
brie
f
press decreases the speed by
1 mph
(
km/h
)
.
A
maintained press decreases the speed in
s
teps of 5 mph
(
km/h
)
.
Operatin
g
fault
The programmed speed is cleared then
replaced b
y
three dashes. Contact a
PEUGE
O
T dealer or a qualified workshop to
have the system checked.
FIXED
S
PEED LIMITER
I
f
y
our vehicle is
f
itted with this
f
unction,
the speed o
f
y
our vehicle can be limited to
a fixed speed of approximatel
y
56, 60, 70
or 80 mph
(
90, 100, 110 or 130 km
/
h
)
. The
f
ixed maximum speed cannot be chan
g
ed.
The
f
ixed speed limiter is not a
f
unction
o
f the cruise control t
y
pe. It cannot be
act
i
vate
d
or
d
eact
i
vate
d
by
t
h
e
d
r
i
ver w
hil
e
drivin
g
.
5
3
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
SPEED LIMITER "LIMIT"
However, pressing the pedal beyond this
p
oint of resistance to the floor allows the
pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
to
b
e excee
d
e
d
.
T
o
resume use o
f
the limiter, simply reduce
the
p
ressure on the accelerator
p
edal
g
ra
d
ua
lly
an
d
return to a spee
d
b
e
l
ow t
h
at
programmed.
F
unct
i
on se
l
ecte
d
,
displa
y
in
g
o
f
the "
S
peed
Limiter" s
y
mbol.
Function deactivated,
last pro
g
rammed speed -
O
FF
(
example at 65 mph
(
107 km
/
h
))
.
F
u
n
c
ti
o
n
ac
tiv
a
t
ed
(
example at 65 mph
(
107 km
/
h
))
.
V
e
hi
c
l
e spee
d
a
b
ove
(
example 70 mph
(
118 km
/
h
))
,
t
h
e pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
is displayed
f
lashing.
O
peratin
g
f
ault detected,
OFF - th
e
das
h
es
f
l
as
h.
This speed limiter shows the
f
unction
s
election status in the instrument
p
anel and
di
sp
l
a
y
s t
h
e pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
:
T
he operatin
g
actions ma
y
be carried out
w
h
en stat
i
onar
y
, w
i
t
h
t
h
e en
gi
ne runn
i
n
g
,
or with the vehicle movin
g.
"This is the selected speed which the driver
does
n
o
t wi
s
h t
o
e
x
ceed
".
This selection is made with the en
g
ine runnin
g
while stationar
y
or with the vehicle movin
g
. The
mi
n
i
mum spee
d
w
hi
c
h
can
b
e pro
g
ramme
d
i
s
20 mph
(
30 km
/
h
)
.
The speed o
f
the vehicle responds to the
p
ressure of the driver's foot as far as the
accelerator pedal point of resistance which
indicates that the programmed speed has been
reac
h
ed
.
54
Steerin
g
mounted controls
Selectin
g
the function
- Place the switch in the LIMIT position.
The limiter is selected but is not yet
active. The screen indicates the last
programmed speed.
Pro
g
rammin
g
a speed
A
spee
d
can
b
e pro
g
ramme
d
w
i
t
h
out
a
ctivatin
g
the limiter but with the en
g
ine
runnin
g
.
To memorise a speed hi
g
her than the
prev
i
ous one:
- press the Set + button.
A brief press increases the speed b
y
1 mph
(
km
/
h
)
.
A
ma
i
nta
i
ne
d
press
i
ncreases t
h
e spee
d
i
n
s
teps o
f
5 mph
(
km
/
h
)
.
T
o memor
i
se a spee
d
l
ower t
h
an t
h
e
previous one:
- press the Set - button.
A brie
f
press decreases the speed b
y
1 mph
(
km
/
h
)
.
A maintained press decreases the speed in
s
teps of 5 mph
(
km/h
)
.
Activation/Deactivation
(
off
)
Pressin
g
this button once activates the
l
imiter, pressin
g
the button a
g
ain deactivates
it
(O
FF
)
.
5
5
Steering mounted controls
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Flashin
g
of the speed
The speed
f
lashes:
- following forcing of the accelerator point
of resistance,
- when the limiter cannot prevent an
increase in the vehicle speed due to the
profile of the road or on a steep descent,
- in the event of sharp acceleration.
Exceedin
g
the pro
g
rammed speed
Pressin
g
the accelerator pedal in order to
e
xcee
d
t
h
e pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
w
ill
h
ave
n
o e
ff
ect unless
y
ou press the pedal
f
irml
y
be
y
ond the
p
oint of resistanc
e
.
Good practice
Operatin
g
fault
The programmed speed is cleared then
r
eplaced b
y
three dashes.
C
ontact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer or a quali
f
ied
workshop to have the s
y
stem checked.
The limiter is deactivated temporaril
y
and
the pro
g
rammed speed
f
lashes.
To return to the limiter
f
unction, reduce
y
our
s
peed to below the pro
g
rammed speed.
Switchin
g
the function off
- Place the switch in position 0 or switch
off the ignition to switch the system off.
Th
e
l
ast pro
g
ramme
d
spee
d
rema
i
ns
i
n t
h
e
memor
y.
In an
y
event, the speed limiter cannot
r
ep
l
ace t
h
e nee
d
to o
b
serve spee
d
li
m
i
ts,
n
or can it replace the need
f
or vigilance and
r
esponsibilit
y
on the part of the driver.
A
lwa
y
s pa
y
attention to the pro
f
ile o
f
the
r
oad and sharp acceleration and sta
y
in
c
omplete control o
f
y
our vehicle.
T
o avo
id
an
y
j
amm
i
n
g
un
d
er t
h
e pe
d
a
l
s:
- ensure that the mat and its fixings on the
floor are positioned correctly,
- never place one mat on top of another.
V
entilation
WITH MANUAL SETTINGS
If
y
our vehicle is fitted with these controls,
the
y
are located on the control panel o
f
the
das
h
boa
r
d
ce
ntr
e
co
n
so
l
e
.
Ai
r
di
str
ib
ut
i
on
A
ir distribution is directed by turning the
co
ntr
o
l t
o
w
a
r
ds
:
t
he
side
v
e
nt
s
a
n
d
t
he
ce
ntr
al
vents,
t
h
e s
id
e vents, t
h
e centra
l
vents
and the
f
ootwells,
the footwells,
the windscreen and the
f
ootwells,
Air flow
The air conditionin
g
does not operate if the
a
ir flow is set to
0
.
th
e
win
dsc
r
ee
n.
Air conditionin
g
A/C
I
f
f
itted on
y
our vehicle, the air conditionin
g
c
an onl
y
operate with the en
g
ine runnin
g
.
P
ress
i
n
g
t
h
e
b
utton tr
igg
ers t
h
e
o
peration o
f
the air conditioning,
the LED is on. Pressin
g
the
button a
g
ain switches the function
off
and the LED goes o
ff
.
Temperature ad
j
ustment
Control positioned:
- in the red zone, produces
heating of the interior air.
- in the blue zone, produces
cool air,
Th
e
a
ir
d
i
s
tri
bu
ti
o
n
ca
n
be
mo
d
u
l
ate
d
by
p
l
ac
i
n
g
t
h
e contro
l
in the intermediate positions,
m
a
rk
ed
"●".
The
f
an speed varies
f
rom 1 to
th
e
fas
t
es
t 4. P
os
iti
o
n
0
s
wit
c
h
es
it
o
ff.
Remember to ad
j
ust this control
i
n
o
r
de
r t
o
a
tt
ai
n t
he
desi
r
ed
co
m
fo
rt l
e
v
e
l.
V
ENTILATION
5
7
V
entilation
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Intake of exterior ai
r
Recommended settin
g
s
For optimum operation of the manual s
y
stem, the settin
g
s below are recommended:
Th
e
LED in th
e
bu
tt
o
n i
s
off
. Thi
s
is the pre
f
erred operatin
g
position.
Recirculation of interior ai
r
Th
e
LED in th
e
bu
tt
o
n i
s
o
n.
R
ecirculation temporaril
y
prevents
e
xt
e
r
io
r
odou
r
s
a
n
d
s
m
oke
f
rom enterin
g
the passen
g
e
r
c
om
p
artment.
Used with the air conditionin
g
switched on
and settin
g
of the force of blown air
(
from
1 to 4
)
, recirculation enables you to obtain
the re
q
uired ambient air comfort level more
q
u
i
c
kly
w
i
t
h
b
ot
h
h
ot or co
ld
sett
i
n
g
s.
This position should onl
y
be temporar
y
.
W
hen
y
our ambient air com
f
ort level has
been reached, return to the intake o
f
exterior
air position to permit renewal of the air in the
p
assen
g
er compartment an
d
avo
id
m
i
st
i
n
g
.
This operatin
g
mode is pre
f
erable.
If I re
q
uire ...
Air
d
i
s
tri
bu
ti
o
n
Tem
p
erature Air fl
o
w
Air
r
ec
ir
cu
l
a
ti
o
n
Air
c
onditionin
g
A
/C
H
eat
i
n
g
Coolin
g
Demistin
g
Defrostin
g
5
8
V
entilation
DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING WITH SEPARATE SETTINGS
Good
p
ractice
For maximum coolin
g
or heatin
g
o
f
the
passen
g
er compartment, it is possible to exceed
the value 15 b
y
turnin
g
until L
O
is displa
y
ed or
the value 27 b
y
turnin
g
until HI is displa
y
ed.
For optimum com
f
ort, the di
ff
erence between
the value displa
y
ed
f
or the driver and
f
or the
passen
g
er should not be
g
reater than 3.
I
f
y
our vehicle is
f
itted with this control
p
anel, it is located on the centre console.
O
n enterin
g
the vehicle, the inside
temperature ma
y
be much colder
(
or
warmer
)
than is comfortable. There is no
a
d
vanta
g
e
i
n c
h
an
gi
n
g
t
h
e va
l
ue
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
in order to quickl
y
reach the level o
f
com
f
ort
r
equired. The s
y
stem will use its maximum
p
er
f
ormance to reach the com
f
ort value set.
59
V
entilation
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Driver or passenger side comfort value
The value indicated on the display
c
orres
p
onds to a level of comfort and
not a temperature in de
g
rees Celsius or
F
a
hr
e
nh
e
it.
A
utomat
i
c operat
i
on
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
l
oca
t
ed
o
n th
e
win
dsc
r
ee
n
be
hin
d
th
e
m
irror, it is used
f
or re
g
ulation o
f
the air
c
onditionin
g
.
AUTO comfort programme
This is the normal air conditionin
g
s
y
stem
operat
i
n
g
mo
d
e.
Press this button, the
A
UTO s
y
mbol is
displa
y
ed.
Depending on the com
f
ort value
s
elected, the system controls the
distribution, the
fl
ow and the intake o
f
air to
guarantee com
f
ort and a su
ffi
cient circulation o
f
air
in the passenger compartment. No
f
urther action
on your part is required.
Wh
en t
h
e en
gi
ne
i
s co
ld
, to prevent an
e
xcessive di
ff
usion o
f
cold air, the ventilation
will reach its optimum level
g
raduall
y
.
For
y
our com
f
ort, the settin
g
s are stored when
the i
g
nition is switched off and are reinstated
the next time the vehicle is started, i
f
the
temperature in the passen
g
er compartment
h
as not chan
g
ed si
g
nifi cantl
y
; otherwise,
operat
i
on resumes
i
n automat
i
c mo
d
e.
T
u
rn thi
s
co
ntr
o
l t
o
th
e
l
e
ft
o
r t
o
t
h
e r
igh
t to
d
ecrease or
i
ncrease
the value. A settin
g
around the
value 21 provides optimum
c
om
f
ort.However, dependin
g
on
y
our
requirements, a settin
g
between
18
and
2
4
i
s
usua
l.
V
entilation
Air flow
Pr
ess
th
e
small fan
bu
tt
o
n t
o
r
educe
th
e
fl
o
w
o
r th
e
l
ar
g
e fan
bu
tt
o
n t
o
in
c
r
ease
th
e
fl
o
w.
O
n the displa
y
, the blades of the fan darken
wh
e
n th
e
f
l
o
w i
s
in
c
r
eased
.
M
anua
l
operat
i
on
You can, accordin
g
to
y
our requirements,
ma
k
e
a
d
iff
e
r
e
nt
se
l
ec
ti
o
n fr
o
m th
a
t
o
ff
e
r
ed
by
t
h
e s
y
stem
by
c
h
an
gi
n
g
a sett
i
n
g
.
Th
e
o
th
e
r
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
s
will
s
till
be
co
ntr
o
ll
ed
automaticall
y
. Pressin
g
the
A
UTO
bu
tt
o
n
r
estores
f
ull
y
automatic operation.
Intake of exterior air /
Recirculation of interior air
Pr
ess
thi
s
bu
tt
o
n t
o
r
ec
ir
cu
l
a
t
e
th
e
int
e
ri
o
r
a
ir. Th
e
r
ec
ir
cu
l
a
ti
o
n
sy
m
b
o
l
i
s
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
.
R
ec
i
rcu
l
at
i
on prevents exter
i
or o
d
ours
and smoke
f
rom entering the passenger
c
ompartment. Avoid prolon
g
ed operation
in interior air recirculation mode
(
risk o
f
c
ondensation, odour and humidity
)
.
P
ress
i
n
g
t
hi
s
b
utton a
g
a
i
n act
i
vates t
h
e
int
a
k
e
of
e
xt
e
ri
o
r
a
ir.
Air distribution
Pressin
g
this button several times
in
success
i
o
n
d
ir
ec
t
s
th
e
a
ir
f
l
o
w
t
o
w
a
r
ds
:
- the windscreen,
- the windscreen and footwells,
- the footwells,
- the side vents, central vents and
footwells,
- the side vents and central vents.
Deactivating the system
Pr
ess
th
e
a
ir fl
o
w small fan
button until the
f
an s
y
mbol
disappears.
Thi
s
ac
ti
o
n
deac
tiv
a
t
es
a
ll
of
th
e
sy
stem's
f
unctions, with the exception o
f
the
a
ir recirculation and rear screen demistin
g
(
i
f
f
itted on
y
our vehicle
)
. Your com
f
ort settin
g
is no lon
g
er maintained and is switched o
ff
.
For
y
our com
f
ort, do not deactivate the
sy
stem for lon
g
periods.
Pressin
g
the lar
g
e fan
bu
tt
o
n
o
r
th
e
AUT
O
bu
tt
o
n r
eac
tiv
a
t
es
th
e
sy
stem with the values set be
f
ore
it w
as
deac
tiv
a
t
ed
.
Switching the air conditioning
On / Off
P
ress t
hi
s
b
utton, t
h
e A/
C
sy
mbol is displa
y
ed and the air
c
onditionin
g
is activated.
Pressin
g
this button a
g
ain switches off the
a
i
r coo
li
n
g
.
V
entilation
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
CORRECT USE OF THE
V
ENTILATION AND AIR
CONDITIONING
Passen
g
er compartment filter,
c
arbon filte
r
Ensure that this
fi
lter is in
g
ood condition and
h
ave all o
f
the
fi
lter elements replaced re
g
ularl
y
.
V
ents
"
Leave t
h
em o
p
en
"
For optimum distribution and diffusion of hot
or coo
l
a
i
r
i
n t
h
e passenger compartment,
there are ad
j
ustable central and side vents
which can be directed sidewa
y
s
(
ri
g
ht or
l
e
f
t
)
towards the top o
f
the body. For your
c
om
f
ort while drivin
g
, do not close them,
d
ir
ec
t th
e
fl
o
w
o
f
a
ir t
o
w
a
r
ds
th
e
win
do
w
s
i
n
s
t
ead
.
Th
e
a
ir v
e
nt
s
d
ir
ec
t
ed
t
o
w
a
r
ds
th
e
f
l
oo
r
of
the vehicle complete the equipment.
Re
f
er to the "
C
hecks" section o
f
c
hapter
6
.
A
ir conditionin
g
I
n a
ll
seasons, t
h
e a
i
r con
di
t
i
on
i
n
g
s
h
ou
ld
onl
y
be used with the windows closed.
H
owever, if the interior tem
p
erature remains
hi
g
h a
f
ter a prolon
g
ed period parked
in the sun,
f
irst ventilate the passen
g
er
c
om
p
artment for a few minutes.
Use the AUT
O
mode as much as
possible as it permits optimised control
of all of the functions: air flow, passen
g
er
c
ompartment com
f
ort temperature,
air distribution, air intake mode or air
r
ecirculation in the passen
g
er compartment.
O
perate the air conditionin
g
s
y
stem
f
or 5 to
10 minutes, once or twice a month, to keep
it in per
f
ect working order.
I
t
i
s norma
l
t
h
at t
h
e con
d
ensat
i
on create
d
by
the air conditionin
g
s
y
stem results in a
f
low
of water which ma
y
form a puddle under the
ve
hi
c
l
e w
h
en par
k
e
d
.
If the s
y
stem does not produce cold air, do
n
ot use it and contact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer o
r
a
q
ualified worksho
p
.
62
V
entilation
P
ress t
h
e a
i
r con
di
t
i
on
i
ng
b
utton.
Tu
rn t
he
co
ntr
ol
t
o
t
his
air
distribution settin
g
.
T
u
rn th
e
co
ntr
o
l t
o
thi
s
temperature sett
i
n
g
.
Increase the air
f
low setting.
DEMISTING AND DEFROSTING
Returnin
g
to exterior air intake
open permits renewal o
f
the air
in the passen
g
er compartment
(
LED off
)
.
M
anua
l
mo
d
e
6
3
V
entilation
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Demistin
g
the rear screen and
/
o
r
mi
rrors
Pressin
g
this button, with the en
g
ine
r
unnin
g
, activates the rapid demistin
g
-
de
f
rostin
g
o
f
the rear screen and
/
or electric
m
irr
o
r
s
.
Thi
s
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
s
wit
c
h
es
off
:
- when the button is pressed,
- when the engine is switched off,
- automatically to prevent excessive
energy consumption.
Automatic air conditioning: visibility
programme
The com
f
ort pro
g
ramme
(
AUT
O)
ma
y
not
be sufficient to quickl
y
demist or defrost the
windows
(
humidit
y
, several passen
g
ers, ice
)
.
I
n t
hi
s case, se
l
ect t
h
e v
i
s
ibili
t
y
pro
g
ramme.
The visibilit
y
pro
g
ramme indicator lamp
co
m
es
o
n.
It activates the air conditionin
g
, the air
flow, the defrostin
g
of the rear screen
a
nd provides optimum distribution o
f
the
v
e
ntil
a
ti
o
n t
o
th
e
win
dsc
r
ee
n
a
n
d
s
i
de
w
i
n
do
w
s
.
It
deac
tiv
a
t
es
th
e
a
ir r
ec
ir
cu
l
a
ti
o
n.
64
V
entilation
Good
p
ractice
To avoid an
y
risk of poisonin
g
o
r
a
sp
hy
x
i
at
i
on, t
h
e
h
eater must not
b
e use
d
,
even
f
or short periods, in an enclosed space
s
uch as a
g
ara
g
e or workshop which is not
fitted with an exhaust
g
as extraction s
y
stem.
Do not
p
ark the vehicle on an inflammable
s
ur
f
ace
(
dr
y
g
rass, dead leaves, paper…
)
,
th
e
r
e
i
s
a
ri
s
k
of
f
ir
e
.
The temperature near the heater must not
e
xceed 120 °C. A temperature hi
g
her than
this
(f
or example in the case o
f
paintin
g
in
an oven
)
could dama
g
e the components o
f
th
e
e
l
ec
tr
o
ni
c
c
ir
cu
it
s
.
The heater is supplied b
y
the vehicle's fuel
tank. Ensure that the low fuel warnin
g
lamp
i
s
n
o
t
o
n.
ADDITIONAL HEATING
Coolant circuit heater
This is an additional and separate s
y
stem
which heats the Diesel en
g
ine coolin
g
sy
stem to ma
k
e start
i
n
g
eas
i
er.
It improves the demistin
g
and defrostin
g
p
er
f
ormance.
Vehicles
f
itted with an HDi en
g
ine ma
y
be
f
itted with a heater. When the en
g
ine is at
idle or the vehicle is stationar
y
, it is normal
to not
i
ce a
high
-p
i
tc
h
e
d
w
hi
st
li
n
g
no
i
se an
d
a sli
g
ht emission o
f
smoke and odour.
6
5
V
entilation
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
H
a
v
e
th
e
h
ea
t
e
r
c
h
ec
k
ed
a
t l
eas
t
o
nce a
y
ear at the be
g
innin
g
of winter.
M
a
i
ntenance an
d
repa
i
rs s
h
ou
ld
on
ly
b
e
c
arried out b
y
a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer or a
q
ualified worksho
p
. Use recommended
r
ep
l
acement parts on
ly
.
6
6
Improved comfort
IMPROVED COMFORT
Protection of the drivin
g
position
The Expert is fitted with a ladder t
y
pe
s
eparat
i
on w
i
t
h
l
oa
d
reta
i
ner at t
h
e
b
ase, so
protectin
g
the
f
ront occupants a
g
ainst the
ri
s
k
s
o
f l
oad
m
o
v
e
m
e
nt.
A
s an option, panel or
g
lazed separation
p
artitions permit separation o
f
the load
s
pace
f
rom the cab
f
or increased protection
and im
p
roved acoustic and tem
p
erature-
re
l
a
t
ed
co
m
fo
rt.
Treatment of the bod
y
work leadin
g
to acoustic comfort
The underseal under the bod
y
, on the bod
y
sill
s an
d
on t
h
e w
h
ee
l
arc
h
es cons
id
era
bly
r
educes noise and protects the bod
y
f
rom
e
xternal attack. The Expert is treated b
y
c
ataphoresis, ensurin
g
per
f
ect protection
a
g
ainst corrosion. The anticorrosion
warrant
y
has a duration of 6
y
ears.
6
7
S
eats
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
FRONT SEATS
Dependin
g
on the version and con
f
i
g
uration
of
y
our vehicle, different front seats are
f
itted, either:
- a driver's seat and a passenger seat,
- an individual driver's seat and a two-
seat passenger bench.
Dependin
g
on the models, the followin
g
ad
j
ustments are available:
3 - Driver's seat height adjustment
Depending on the version and con
f
iguration
of
y
our vehicle,
y
ou have either:
- a passive adjustment: pull the handle
upwards then take your weight off the
seat to raise, or push on the seat to
lower,
2 - Seat back angle adjustment
Pull the lever upwards and set the required
an
g
le.
1 - Forwards/backwards adjustment
Lift th
e
ba
r
a
n
d
s
li
de
th
e
sea
t f
o
rw
a
r
ds
o
r
bac
kw
a
r
ds
.
6
8
Seats
- an active adjustment: operate the handle
upwards or downwards until the desired
position is reached.
Head restraint height adjustment
To raise or lower the restraint,
p
ull it
f
orwards, then slide it.
The ad
j
ustment is correct when the upper
ed
g
e of the head restraint is level with the
top o
f
the head.
T
o remove
i
t, set
i
t
i
n t
h
e
high
pos
i
t
i
on, press
the tabs and pull upwards and
f
orwards at
th
e
sa
m
e
tim
e
.
To re-install, en
g
a
g
e the head restraint rods
in the holes, makin
g
sure the
y
are ali
g
ned
w
i
t
h
t
he
sea
t
back
.
N
e
v
e
r
d
riv
e
with th
e
h
ead
r
es
tr
a
int
s
r
emoved; the
y
must be in place and
c
orrect
ly
a
dj
uste
d
.
Front heated seat controls
Adjustable armrest
To place the armrest in its rest position:
- raise it until it is in the centreline of the
seat back.
4 - Driver's seat lumbar adjustment
M
ove t
h
e
l
ever up or
d
own to o
b
ta
i
n t
h
e
r
equired position.
Press the correspondin
g
control,
l
ocated on the overhead stora
g
e
u
n
i
t.
Th
e temperature
i
s contro
ll
e
d
automatically.
P
ress
i
n
g
a secon
d
t
i
me stops operat
i
on.
To place the armrest in a position for use:
- fold it down fully,
- raise it slowly to the required position,
- if you pass the required position, raise it
fully then repeat the operations above.
69
S
eats
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
2-SEAT FRONT BENCH
I
f
y
our vehicle is
f
itted with this bench seat,
it is fixed and has a
3
rd seat belt.
H
ea
d
restra
i
nt
Press the tab to ad
j
ust the hei
g
ht o
f
the
head
r
es
tr
a
int.
To remove the head restraint, press the tabs
a
n
d
r
a
i
se
th
e
h
ead
r
es
tr
a
int.
The ad
j
ustment is correct when the upper
e
d
g
e o
f
the head restraint is level with the
top o
f
the head.
Ne
v
e
r
d
r
i
v
e
w
i
t
h
t
he
head
r
es
tr
ai
nt
s
r
emoved; the
y
must be in place and
ad
j
usted correctl
y
.
7
0
Seats
W
r
i
t
i
n
g
ta
bl
e
I
f
f
itted to your vehicle, the back o
f
the
c
entre seat of the bench
(
Row 1
)
folds to
form a writin
g
table with two cup holder
recesses
.
Pull the handle located at the top o
f
the seat
bac
k
cus
hi
o
n.
7
1
Practical information
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
CAB FITTINGS
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
various fittin
g
s below enhance
y
our cab.
Glove box
This is fitted with a lock,
y
ou can lock it
us
i
n
g
t
h
e
k
e
y
.
It
co
nt
a
in
s
thr
ee
soc
k
e
t
s
fo
r th
e
co
nn
ec
ti
o
n
o
f
portable electronic equipment
(
video
equipment, ...
)
if the vehicle is fitted with a
colou
r
sc
r
ee
n.
I
t a
l
so conta
i
ns cup
h
o
ld
ers an
d
c
ompartments
f
or storing maps, a packet o
f
c
i
g
arettes, an A4 format document, a pen, etc.
Stora
g
e compartment
PRACTICAL INFORMATION
Sun viso
r
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold the sun
vi
so
r
do
wn.
A
poc
k
et
i
s prov
id
e
d
i
n t
h
e
d
r
i
ver
'
s sun v
i
sor
f
or storin
g
toll cards, tickets, ...
72
P
ractical information
Ashtra
y
Stora
g
e tra
y
and bottle holder
(
1.5 L
)
A
n
y
li
qu
id
carr
i
e
d
i
n an open receptac
l
e
(
cup or other
)
may be spilt, with the risk
of dama
g
e to switches and controls at the
d
r
i
v
i
n
g
pos
i
t
i
on an
d
centre conso
l
e.
"T
a
k
e
ca
r
e
".
Ticket stora
g
e
A
ccordin
g
to the confi
g
uration of the vehicle.
12 volt socket
The maximum power o
f
the socket, which is
of the ci
g
arette li
g
hter t
y
pe, is 120 W.
7
3
Practical information
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
Overhead stora
g
e unit
This
is
loca
t
ed
abo
v
e
t
he
su
n v
iso
r
s
a
n
d
has
two compartments
f
or storing a jumper, a
file, ...
Be aware that storin
g
a hard ob
j
ect in direct
c
ontact with the compartment ma
y
result in
noise
.
Tip: the central cavit
y
o
f
the overhead
s
tora
g
e unit, located in the extension o
f
the
vehicle's roof between the rear space and
t
h
e ca
b
, a
ll
ows
l
on
g
o
bj
ects to
b
e carr
i
e
d
.
Take care to support and wed
g
e them
s
ecurel
y
.
The tunnel ma
y
be added to b
y
an internal
rack, offered as an accessor
y
.
For raised vehicles, a shelf located above
t
h
e over
h
ea
d
stora
g
e un
i
t can
b
e use
d
to
s
tore small ob
j
ects and materials
(
straps,
c
loths,
g
loves, helmets, etc...
)
.
74
P
ractical information
COURTESY LAMPS
Automatic operation
The
f
ront courtes
y
lamp comes on when
the ke
y
is removed from the i
g
nition, when
the vehicle is unlocked, when one o
f
the
f
ront doors is o
p
ened and
f
or location o
f
the
vehicle usin
g
the remote control.
It
g
oes off
g
raduall
y
after the i
g
nition is
s
w
i
t
ched
o
n
a
n
d
w
he
n t
he
v
ehicle
is
locked
.
Permanentl
y
on, i
g
nition on.
Cab
:
co
m
es
o
n wh
e
n
o
n
e
of
th
e
front doors is o
p
ened.
Load space: comes on when one
of
the rear doors is opened.
Permanentl
y
off.
Front individual reading lamps Rear courtesy lamp
These are switched on and o
ff
b
y
m
eans of a manual switch, with the
ig
n
i
t
i
on on.
Areas for toll cards / car
p
ark tickets
The
a
t
he
rm
ic
w
i
n
dsc
r
ee
n
has
tw
o
n
o
n-
ref
l
ec
tiv
e
z
o
n
es
l
oca
t
ed
e
ith
e
r
s
i
de
of
th
e
base
o
f th
e
int
e
ri
o
r mirr
o
r.
The
y
are intended
f
or a
ff
ixin
g
toll cards
and/or car park tickets.
Front courtesy lamp
If the doors remain o
p
en for a few minutes,
the courtes
y
lamps
g
o o
ff
.
75
Practical information
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
C
REW
C
AB
Bench seat
The crew cab consists of a 3-seat bench
,
l
ocated in row 2, the one-piece back o
f
which is fixed to the "load retainer"
g
lazed
p
art
i
t
i
on.
A
ccess to the rear seats is via the slidin
g
side
doo
r.
Head rests and seat belts
Each seat has a head rest ad
j
ustable for
h
e
igh
t an
d
an
gl
e.
Th
e t
h
ree seats are equ
i
ppe
d
w
i
t
h
i
nert
i
a
reel seat belts. The seat belts are inte
g
ral
with th
e
bac
kr
es
t
o
f th
e
be
n
c
h
sea
t.
En
su
r
e
th
a
t th
e
sea
t
be
lt i
s
a
tt
ac
h
ed
t
o
th
e
co
rr
ec
t
buckle
.
F
o
r m
o
r
e
inf
o
rm
a
ti
o
n
o
n th
e
use
o
f thi
s
equipment, re
f
er to "
S
eat belts" in section 4.
Good
p
ractice
The rear seat belt stalks are not desi
g
ned for securin
g
the load transported. Use the lashin
g
rin
g
s on the floor onl
y
.
Th
e
be
n
c
h
sea
t
o
f th
e
c
r
e
w
cab
i
s
n
o
t
su
it
ab
l
e
f
o
r th
e
in
s
t
a
ll
a
ti
o
n
o
f
a
c
hil
d
sea
t.
Rear side
g
lasses
If fitted to
y
our vehicle, the side
g
lasses can
be opened.
S
queeze the two controls to
g
ether then slide
the window. There are 4 position notches.
When driving, the glass should be closed or
secu
r
ed
a
t
o
n
e
o
f th
e
4 n
o
t
c
h
es
.
76
P
ractical information
LOAD SPACE FITTINGS
Dependin
g
on the vehicle's equipment, the
various fittin
g
s below enhance
y
our load
space
.
Locations for lashin
g
rails
Locations for fittin
g
a lashin
g
rail are
a
v
a
il
ab
l
e
o
n
eac
h
s
i
de
of
th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
.
Lashin
g
rin
g
s
Use the lashin
g
rin
g
s on the rear floor to
s
ecure
y
our
l
oa
d
s.
As a safet
y
precaution in case of sharp
braking, you are advised to place heavy
ob
j
ects as far forwards towards the cab as
poss
ibl
e.
You are advised to immobilise the load b
y
s
ecurin
g
it
f
irml
y
usin
g
the lashin
g
rin
g
s on
th
e
f
l
oo
r.
Trims
The lower
p
arts of the sides are fitted with
l
oa
d
protect
i
on tr
i
ms.
Roof box on raised version
This is a stora
g
e compartment located in the
l
oad s
p
ace, above the cab roof.
77
Practical information
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
12 volt socket
This operates with the i
g
nition on.
Maximum power:
120
W.
Loa
d
reta
i
ner
O
n the
f
loor, behind the
f
ront seats, a
horizontal
p
artition
p
rotects the driver and
f
ront passen
g
ers a
g
ainst the risk o
f
load
m
o
v
e
m
e
nt.
P
ane
l
or g
l
aze
d
separat
i
on part
i
t
i
ons perm
i
t
s
e
p
aration o
f
the load s
p
ace
f
rom the cab.
La
dd
er t
y
pe vert
i
ca
l
separat
i
on or
p
art
i
t
i
on
Behind the driver's seat, a ladder type
vertical se
p
aration or
p
artition
p
rotects the
driver a
g
ainst the risk of load movement.
78
Rear sus
p
ension
Metal sus
p
ension
Thi
s equ
i
pment a
d
opts
l
on
g
movement
li
m
i
ters
which make it possible to
g
uarantee stable
behaviour both when loaded and when empt
y
.
N
o act
i
on on
y
our part
i
s requ
i
re
d
except to
e
n
su
r
e
th
a
t m
a
int
e
n
a
n
ce
i
s
ca
rri
ed
ou
t
a
n
d
th
a
t
the authorised loads are com
p
lied with.
irrespective o
f
the wei
g
ht o
f
the load, within
the limit of the authorised values.
O
n board,
the increasin
g
or li
g
htenin
g
of the load on
the vehicle's plat
f
orm is detected b
y
two
hei
g
ht sensors. When all of the doors are
cl
ose
d
, t
h
e sensors tr
igg
er t
h
e automat
i
c
hei
g
ht correction and determine the optimum
hei
g
ht of the sill for the vehicle's drivin
g
co
n
di
t
io
n
s
.
Deactivation of automatic height correction
The control which permits deactivation o
f
automatic re
g
ulation is located on the ri
g
ht-
h
and side, at the rear of the vehicle.
REAR SUSPENSION
You must deactivate automatic height
c
orrection manuall
y
in the followin
g
si
t
ua
t
io
n
s
:
- when working underneath the vehicle,
- when changing a wheel,
- when the vehicle is being transported by
lorry, train, ferry, boat, ...
Two t
y
pes of suspension are available.
R
ear sus
p
ens
i
on w
i
t
h
p
neumat
i
c
h
e
igh
t correct
i
on
I
f
f
itted on
y
our vehicle, this t
y
pe o
f
s
uspension re
g
ulates the variations in the
h
ei
g
ht o
f
the rear plat
f
orm o
f
y
our vehicle
1. Automatic height
correction
2. Manual height
correction
1 - Automatic correction of the
hei
g
ht of the rear sill
The pneumatic suspension automaticall
y
re
g
ulates the variations in the hei
g
ht of the
rear plat
f
orm o
f
y
our vehicle.
A
red warnin
g
li
g
ht on
y
our
instrument panel
fl
ashes i
f
the
h
ei
g
ht is not at its optimum level
and requires correction, drive slowl
y
u
ntil this warnin
g
lamp
g
oes o
ff
.
The automatic hei
g
ht correction is
temporar
ily
i
nact
i
ve:
- if a door / the tailgate is open,
- when braking or when stopped at a red
traffic signal (brake pedal pressed).
Wi
t
h
t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e stat
i
onar
y
:
- press and hold,
- release the control.
Return to automatic correction
Wi
t
h
t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e stat
i
onar
y
:
- press and hold,
- release the control.
A
ccording to the con
f
igurations, a beep may
be heard durin
g
these operations.
Two functions
Deactivation is con
f
irmed b
y
the LED which
is on. It remains on for approximatel
y
3
0 seconds.
Return to automatic hei
g
ht correction is
c
onfirmed b
y
the LED which
g
oes off.
79
R
ear sus
p
ens
i
on
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
2 - Manual correction of the hei
g
ht
of the rear sill
First use
To initialise the
f
unction, press the control
for approximatel
y
2 seconds.
Return to the optimum sill height
Press the control u
p
or down twice in
s
uccession, the opposite of the position o
f
t
he
load
sill
.
C
arr
y
out these operations with the vehicle
s
till stationar
y
and:
- with the front and side doors closed,
- with the parking brake applied,
- do not leave your foot on the brake
pedal.
I
f
your vehicle is
f
itted with this adjustment,
the control is located on the ri
g
ht-hand side
a
t th
e
r
ea
r
o
f th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
.
This manual ad
j
ustment permits "lowerin
g
"
or "raisin
g
" o
f
the hei
g
ht o
f
the sill o
f
the rea
r
p
lat
f
orm to
f
acilitate operations in a parkin
g
area
.
This ad
j
ustment of the hei
g
ht of the sill is
r
estr
i
cte
d
by
a
l
ower
li
m
i
t an
d
an upper
li
m
i
t.
Lower: downwards adjustment
of the platform sill
Pr
ess
th
e
co
ntr
o
l
do
wnw
a
r
ds
c
ontinuousl
y
.
Release the button to sto
p
the movement,
"3 beeps" indicate that
y
ou have reached
t
h
e max
i
mum
li
m
i
t, t
h
e movement stops
a
utomaticall
y
.
Raise: upwards adjustment of
the platform sill
Press the control upwards
c
ontinuousl
y
.
Release the button to sto
p
the movement,
"3 beeps" indicate that
y
ou have reached
the maximum limit, the movement stops
a
utomaticall
y
.
Malfunctions
I
f
the load sill is not ad
j
usted when the
c
ontrol is pressed, "
3
beeps" indicate a
m
alfunction for the followin
g
reasons:
- foot on the brake pedal with the key in
the ignition,
- excessive use of the manual correction,
- low battery charge,
- other.
I
f
the audible si
g
nal persists, contact a
PEUGE
O
T dealer or a qualified workshop.
80
Rear suspension
Deactivation of manual height correction
Good practice
When stationar
y
and with the i
g
nition ke
y
removed, excessive use of the s
y
stem
c
onsumes
b
atter
y
power.
Long term parking
A
void parking
f
or a long duration on ground
which could
p
resent a
p
otential obstacle as
y
our ve
hi
c
l
e cou
ld
l
ower.
Followin
g
a lon
g
period out of use, the
h
ei
g
ht o
f
the plat
f
orm ma
y
chan
g
e due to the
automatic hei
g
ht correction on unlockin
g
or
on openin
g
one of
y
our vehicle's doors.
With the vehicle stationar
y
:
- press and hold,
- release the control.
Return to manual height correction
A
ccordin
g
to the confi
g
uration, a beep ma
y
be heard during these operations.
You must deactivate the manual hei
g
ht
c
orrection in the followin
g
situations:
- when working underneath the vehicle,
- when changing a wheel,
- when the vehicle is being transported by
lorry, train, ferry, boat, ...
Warning lamp
Driving with the height o
f
the rear plat
f
orm:
- too low, risks damaging the technical
components underneath the vehicle,
- too high, risks unstable driving.
With the vehicle stationary:
- press and hold,
- release the control.
R
e
f
e
r t
o
th
e
"In
s
tr
u
m
e
nt
s
a
n
d
co
ntr
o
l
s
"
s
ection of chapter 2.
I
f
y
ou start and the warnin
g
lamp
f
lashes, to
s
wit
c
h it
off
:
- correct the position of the manual
control which is still at the lower or
upper limit,
- or drive slowly at above 6 mph (10 km/h),
until height correction returns to automatic
mode.
Return to manual correction is confirmed b
y
the LED which
g
oes o
ff
.
Deactivation is con
f
irmed b
y
the LED which
is on. It remains on
f
or approximatel
y
30
seconds.
8
1
Mirrors and windows
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
MIRRORS
MIRRORS AND WINDOWS
Electric folding / unfolding
If
y
our vehicle is fitted with this function, the
mirrors can be
f
olded or un
f
olded electricall
y
f
rom the inside, with the vehicle parked and
the i
g
nition on:
- Place switch A in the centre position.
- Pull switch A rearwards.
Manual door mirrors
M
o
v
e
th
e
l
e
v
e
r in
a
ll
fou
r
d
ir
ec
ti
o
n
s
t
o
ad
j
ust.
When the vehicle is parked, the door mirrors
c
an be folded back manuall
y
.
Th
e
mirr
o
r i
s
co
nv
e
x t
o
b
r
oade
n th
e
f
i
e
l
d
of
s
ide vision.
O
b
j
ects observed are, in realit
y
,
c
loser than the
y
appear. There
f
ore, take this
into account in order to
j
ud
g
e the distance
c
orrectl
y
.
Heated mirrors
If
y
our vehicle is fitted with this function,
press t
h
e rear screen
d
em
i
st
i
n
g
b
utton.
I
f
the mirror casin
g
has come out o
f
its
initial location, with the vehicle stationar
y
,
r
eposition the mirror casin
g
manuall
y
or use
the electric
f
oldin
g
switch.
There is no risk o
f
breaka
g
e even in the
p
resence o
f
ice.
Electric door mirrors
- Move switch A to the right or to the left
to select the corresponding mirror.
- Move knob B in all four directions to
adjust.
- Return switch A to the centre position.
82
Mirrors and windows
M
anual rear view mirro
r
Th
e rear v
i
ew m
i
rror
h
as two pos
i
t
i
ons:
- day (normal),
- night (anti-dazzle).
To chan
g
e
f
rom one to the other, push o
r
p
ull the lever on the lower ed
g
e of the mirror.
8
3
Mirrors and windows
E
ASE OF USE AND COMFOR
T
3
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
1. Driver's electric window control
2. Passenger electric window control
Th
e
e
l
ec
tri
ca
l
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
s
of
th
e
e
l
ec
tri
c
win
do
w
s
a
r
e
deac
tiv
a
t
ed
:
- approximately 45 seconds after the
ignition is switched off,
- after one of the front doors is opened, if
the ignition is off.
R
e
i
n
i
t
i
a
li
sat
i
on
Followin
g
reconnection o
f
the batter
y
,
the safet
y
anti-pinch function must be
rei
n
i
t
ialised
.
Lower the window full
y
, then raise it, it will
r
ise in steps o
f
a
f
ew centimetres each time
the control is
p
ressed. Re
p
eat the o
p
eration
u
ntil the window is full
y
closed.
Continue to press the control for at least one
s
econd a
f
ter the window closed position has
bee
n r
eac
h
ed
.
The sa
f
et
y
anti-pinch does not operate
durin
g
these operations.
Manual mode
P
ress or pu
ll
t
h
e contro
l
, w
i
t
h
out pass
i
n
g
t
h
e
p
oint o
f
resistance. The window stops when
y
ou release the control.
Automatic mode
P
ress or pu
ll
t
h
e contro
l
,
b
e
y
on
d
t
h
e po
i
nt
o
f
resistance. The window opens or closes
full
y
when the control is released. Pressin
g
the control a
g
ain stops the movement o
f
the
win
do
w.
Safet
y
anti-pinch
If
y
our vehicle is fitted with the safet
y
anti-
pinch
f
unction, when the window rises and
meets an obstacle, it stops and partiall
y
l
o
w
e
r
s
.
In the event of unwanted openin
g
of the
w
i
n
d
ow on c
l
os
i
n
g
, press t
h
e contro
l
unt
il
the window is
f
ull
y
open. Within the next
4 seconds,
p
ull the control until the window
is
f
ull
y
closed.
The safet
y
auto-reverse does not operate
during these operations.
Good
p
ractice
If th
e
e
l
ec
tri
c
win
do
w
s
m
ee
t
a
n
obs
t
ac
l
e
d
ur
i
n
g
operat
i
on,
y
ou must reverse t
h
e
m
ovement o
f
the window. To do this, press
th
e
co
ntr
o
l
co
n
ce
rn
ed
.
When the driver operates the passen
g
er
e
lectric window controls, he must ensure
that no one is preventin
g
correct closin
g
o
f
th
e
win
do
w
s
.
The driver must ensure that the passen
g
ers
u
se the electric windows correctl
y
.
Be aware of children when operatin
g
the
w
i
n
do
w
s
.
Th
ere are two operat
i
n
g
mo
d
es:
84
Driving safely
PARKING BRAKE
There is no advantage in engaging a gear after
parking the vehicle, particularly if the vehicle is loaded.
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Press this button, the direction indicators
flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
The hazard warning lamps should only be
used in dangerous situations, when stopping
in an emergency or when driving in unusual
conditions.
DRIVING SAFELY
Applying
Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise
your vehicle.
Check that the parking brake is applied
firmly before leaving the vehicle.
If the parking brake is still on or has not been
released properly, this is indicated by this warning
lamp which comes on on the instrument panel.
Pull on the parking brake lever, only with
the vehicle stationary .
In the exceptional case of use of the parking
brake when the vehicle is moving, apply the
brake by pulling gently to avoid locking the
rear wheels (risk of skidding).
Releasing
Pull the lever and press the button to lower
the parking brake lever.
When parking on a slope, direct your wheels
towards the pavement and pull the parking
brake lever up.
8
5
Parking sensors
SAFETY
4
Engage reverse gear
An audible signal confirms the activation of
the system by engaging reverse gear.
The proximity information is indicated by an
audible signal which becomes more rapid as
the vehicle approaches the obstacle. When
the distance between the rear of the vehicle
and the obstacle is less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal
becomes continuous.
Stop the assistance
Change to neutral.
REAR PARKING SENSORS
The audible and/or visual rear parking
sensor system consists of four proximity
sensors, installed in the rear bumper. The
sensors detect any obstacle which enters
the field: person, vehicle, tree, fence, behind
the vehicle during the manoeuvre.
Certain objects detected at the beginning of
the manoeuvre will no longer be detected
at the end of the manoeuvre due to the
blind spots between and below the sensors.
Examples: stake, roadworks cone or
pavement post.
Activation / Deactivation
You can activate or deactivate the
system by pressing this button.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, when reverse
gear is engaged the LED in the button
comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the screen. Contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Good practice
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
snow.
The system will be deactivated automatically
if a trailer is being towed or if a bicycle
carrier is fitted (vehicle fitted with a
towbar or bicycle carrier recommended by
PEUGEOT).
The parking assistance cannot, in any
circumstances, take the place of the
vigilance and responsibility of the driver.
Display in the screen
You are advised to deactivate the system if
your vehicle is fitted with a rear ladder or if
you are transporting a load which exceeds
the length of the vehicle.
The activation or deactivation of the system
is stored when the vehicle stops.
ABS
ABS
Driving safely
HORN
Press the centre of the steering wheel.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(
ABS - EBFD
)
The ABS and EBFD (electronic brake force
distribution) systems improve the stability
and manoeuvrability of your vehicle on
braking, in particular on poor or slippery
surfaces.
The ABS prevents locking of the wheels,
the EBFD provides control of the braking
pressure wheel by wheel.
Good practice
The anti-lock braking system comes into
operation automatically when there is a risk
of wheel lock. It does not reduce the braking
distance.
On very slippery surfaces (ice, oil, etc...)
the ABS may increase the braking distance.
When braking in an emergency, do not
hesitate to press the brake pedal firmly,
without releasing the pressure, even on a
slippery surface, you will then be able to
continue to manoeuvre the vehicle to avoid
an obstacle.
Normal operation of the ABS may be felt by
slight vibration of the brake pedal.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
ensure that these are recommended by
PEUGEOT.
If this warning lamp comes on,
together with the brake and STOP
warning lamps, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message
in the screen, it indicates a malfunction of
the electronic brake force distribution which
could result in a loss of control of the vehicle
on braking.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
(
EBA
)
In an emergency, this system enables the
optimum braking pressure to be reached
more quickly, press the pedal firmly without
releasing it.
It is triggered by the speed at which the
brake pedal is activated.
This alters the resistance of the brake pedal
under your foot.
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen,
it indicates a malfunction of the
ABS which could result in a loss of control of
the vehicle on braking.
To prolong the operation of the emergency
braking assistance system: keep your foot
on the brake pedal.
ESP
O
F
F
8
7
Driving safely
SAFETY
4
ANTI-SLIP REGULATION
(
ASR
)
AND DYNAMIC
S
TABILITY
CONTROL
(
DSC
)
These systems are linked and complement
the ABS.
The ASR system is very useful for
maintaining optimum drive and avoiding
losses of control of the vehicle on
acceleration.
The system optimises drive to prevent the
wheels skidding, by acting on the brakes of
the drive wheels and on the engine. It also
allows the directional stability of the vehicle
to be improved on acceleration.
acts on the engine and the brake of one
or more wheels, in order to put the vehicle
back on course.
Deactivating the ASR/DSC systems
In certain exceptional conditions (starting
the vehicle when stuck in mud or snow, or
on loose ground...), it could prove useful
to deactivate the ASR and DSC systems to
make the wheels spin and regain grip.
- Press the button, located on the centre
console.
- The indicator lamp comes on: the ASR
and DSC systems no longer operate.
Operating check
Good practice
The ASR/DSC systems offer increased
safety during normal driving, but should not
encourage the driver to take risks or to drive
at high speed.
The operation of these systems is assured
only if the recommendations of the
manufacturer regarding the wheels (tyres
and rims), the braking components, the
electronic components and fitting and repair
procedures are observed.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Use the DSC to hold your course without
attempting to countersteer.
If there is a variation between the trajectory
followed by the vehicle and that required by
the driver, the DSC system automatically
Operation of the ASR and DSC
systems
The LED flashes when
the ASR or DSC is
triggered.
They engage again:
- automatically above 30 mph (50 km/h),
- manually by pressing the button again.
When a malfunction of the
systems occurs, the warning lamp
comes on, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in
the screen.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
The warning lamp may also come on if the
tyres are under-inflated. Check the pressure
of each tyre.
8
8
Driving safely
"GRIP CONTROL"
Correct use
Your vehicle is designed principally to drive
on tarmac roads but it allows you to drive on
other less passable terrain occasionally.
However, particularly when your vehicle is
heavily laden, it does not permit off-road
activities such as:
- crossing and driving on ground which
could damage the underbody or tear off
components (fuel pipe, fuel cooler, ...),
particularly by obstacles or stones,
- driving on ground with steep gradients
and poor grip,
- crossing a stream.
On snow, mud and sand, this traction
system, associated with the Michelin
®
Agilis
51 M+S all terrain tyres, provides a
compromise between safety, adhesion and
traction.
It allows progress to be made in most
conditions of low adhesion.
The accelerator pedal must
be pressed sufficiently
so that the engine power
can be used to effectively
manage the various
parameters.
ESP OFF
89
Driving safely
SAFETY
4
This DSC mode is calibrated for
a low level of skidding, based
on different conditions of grip
encountered on the road.
When the ignition is switched off, the system
returns automatically to DSC mode.
This DSC OFF mode
is only suitable for
specific conditions
encountered when
This snow mode allows the
vehicle to adapts its strategy
to the conditions of grip
encountered for each of the two
front wheels, on moving off.
When moving, the system optimises
wheelspin to provide the best acceleration
possible for the grip available.
This off-road mode (mud, wet
grass...) allows, when moving off,
considerable wheelspin on the
wheel with the least grip to favour
clearing of the mud and regain "grip". At the
same time, the wheel with the most grip is
controlled in such a way as to transmit as
much torque as possible.
When moving, the system optimises
wheelspin to meet the driver's requirements
as fully as possible.
This sand mode allows a little
wheelspin on the two driving
wheels at the same time to allow
the vehicle to move forward and
reduces the risk of getting stuck in the sand.
Do not use the other modes on sand as the
vehicle may become stuck.
moving off or at low speed.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h) the system returns
to DSC mode automatically.
90
Seat belts
Height adjustment
Squeeze the control with the return and slide
the assembly on the driver's seat side and
on the individual passenger seat side.
If your vehicle is fitted with a front bench,
the height of the seat belt associated with
the centre seat cannot be adjusted.
Unfastening
Press the red button.
SEAT BELTS
Good practice
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
strapped in securely before moving off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
which automatically adjusts the length of the
strap to your size.
Do not use accessories (clothes pegs, clips,
safety pins, etc.) which allow the seat belt
straps to fit loosely.
Ensure that the seat belt has reeled in
correctly after use.
After folding or moving a seat or a rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt has
reeled in correctly and that the buckle is
ready to accommodate the tongue.
Depending on the nature and seriousness
of any impact, the pretensioning device may
be deployed before and independently of
inflation of the airbags. It instantly tightens
the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
Deployment of the pretensioners is
accompanied by a slight discharge of
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
by pulling the strap.
Driver's seat belt not fastened warning
lamp
Passenger seat belt not fastened warning
lamp
When the vehicle is started, this
warning lamp comes on if the
driver has not fastened their seat
belt.
If your vehicle is fitted with a front
passenger seat, when the vehicle
is started, this warning lamp
comes on if the passenger has not
fastened their seat belt.
9
1
Seat belts
SAFETY
4
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is switched on.
The inertia reels are fitted with a device
which automatically locks the strap in the
event of a collision or emergency braking or
if the vehicle rolls over.
You can unfasten the seat belt by pressing
the red button on the buckle. Guide the seat
belt after unfastening.
The airbag warning lamp comes on if the
pretensioners are deployed. Contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- restrain one person only,
- must not be twisted, check by pulling in
front of you with an even movement,
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible.
The upper part of the seat belt should be
positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.
The lap part should be placed as low as
possible on the pelvis.
Do not invert the seat belt buckles as they
will not fulfil their role completely. If the
Recommendations for children:
- use a suitable child seat if the
passenger is less than 12 years old or
shorter than one metre fifty,
- never allow a child to travel on your lap,
even with the seat belt fastened.
FRONT SEAT BELTS
For more information on child seats,
refer to the "Children on board" section
of chapter 4.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, your PEUGEOT dealer can
guarantee all work or any checks, from
testing to maintenance, on your seat belt
equipment.
Have the seat belts checked regularly (even
after a minor impact) by a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop: they must not show
any signs of wear, cutting or fraying and they
must not be converted or modified.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold
by PEUGEOT dealers.
With front airbags
The front seats are fitted with pretensioners
and force limiters.
Without front airbag
If your vehicle is fitted with a front bench
without front airbag, the centre passenger's
seat belt does not have a pretensioner.
With bench seat
If your vehicle is fitted with a front bench
seat, take care to fasten the correct seat
belt using the correct buckle. Do not mix the
driver's seat belt or buckle with the buckle or
seat belt of the centre seat.
seats are fitted with armrests, the lap part of
the seat belt should always pass under the
armrest.
Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
by pulling the strap firmly.
92
Improved safety and security
IMPROVED SAFETY AND
SECURITY
In situations of extreme transverse
acceleration, this module limits the risks
of the vehicle rolling over by acting on the
brakes.
Roll Over Mitigation *
This system, linked with the ESP,
supplements the ABS-EBFD, ASR-ESP and
EBA braking functions, already covered in
this document, to guarantee a high level
of active safety. Indeed, the ROM system
was intended originally for top-of-the-
range 4x4 type vehicles and today it is
fitted on your vehicle.
* Roll-over prevention system.
9
3
Airbags
SAFETY
4
The airbags have been designed to
maximise the safety of the occupants in the
event of a serious collision; they work in
conjunction with the force limiting seat belts.
In the event of a serious collision, the
electronic detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts suffered in the impact
detection zones:
- in the event of a serious impact, the
airbags infl ate instantly and contribute
towards better protecting the occupants of
the vehicle. Immediately after the impact,
the airbags defl ate rapidly, so that they do
not hinder the visibility of the occupants
nor their possible exit from the vehicle.
- in the event of a minor or rear impact
and in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the seat
belt alone is sufficient to contribute
towards your protection in these
situations.
The seriousness of the collision depends on
the nature of the obstacle and the speed of
the vehicle at the moment of impact.
It is imperative that the passenger's
airbag is deactivated if a child seat
is installed facing rearwards. Refer to the
"Children on board" section of chapter 4.
Airbags only operate when the
ignition is switched on.
AIRBAGS
This equipment only operates once. If a
second impact occurs (during the same or
a subsequent accident), the airbag will not
operate.
The deployment of an airbag or airbags is
accompanied by a slight discharge of smoke
and a noise, due to the activation of the
pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the
system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience some irritation.
The noise of the detonation may result in a
slight loss of hearing for a short time.
94
Airbags
Good practice
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
object...). This could hinder the operation of
the airbags or injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
systems checked.
All work on the airbag system is strictly
forbidden unless it is carried out by qualified
personnel at a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are
observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns
to the head, chest or arms when an airbag
is deployed cannot be ruled out. In fact, the
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
Lateral airbags
Only put recommended covers on the seats.
These will not hinder inflation of the lateral
airbags. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backs. This could cause injury to the chest
or arms when the lateral airbag inflates.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body
any nearer to the door than necessary.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel
by its spokes or resting your hands on the
centre part of the wheel.
Do not allow passengers to place their feet
on the dashboard, they risk serious injury if
the airbag is deployed.
Smoke as little as possible as deployment
of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel
or hit it violently.
9
5
Airbags
SAFETY
4
If this warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in the
event of a serious impact.
Lateral airbags
If fitted on your vehicle, this is a system
which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to
the chest.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the front seat
back frame, on the door side.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
The airbag is not deployed in the event of a
rear or front collision.
Operating fault
Deployment
It is deployed unilaterally in the event of a
serious side impact applied to all or part
of the side impact zone B , perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
on a horizontal plane and directed from the
outside towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the
front occupant of the vehicle and the
corresponding door trim panel.
9
6
Airbags
Deactivating
The passenger's front airbag alone can be
deactivated:
- With the ignition switched off , insert
the key into the passenger's airbag
deactivation switch,
- turn it to the "OFF" position,
- then remove the key keeping the switch
in the new position.
Front airbags
The front airbags are fitted in the centre of
the steering wheel for the driver and in the
dashboard for the front passenger.
Reactivation
In the "OFF" position, the passenger's
airbag will not be deployed in the event of
an impact.
As soon as the child seat is removed, turn
the airbag switch to the "ON" position to
reactivate the airbag and thus ensure the
safety of your passenger in the event of an
impact.
To ensure the safety of your child, it is
essential to deactivate the passengers
airbag when you install a rear-facing child
seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise,
the child would risk being killed or seriously
injured if the airbag were to inflate.
The airbag warning lamp in the
instrument panel is on while the
airbag is deactivated.
Deployment
They are deployed simultaneously, unless
the passenger's front airbag has been
deactivated, in the event of a serious front
impact applied to all or part of the front
impact zone A in the longitudinal centreline
of the vehicle on a horizontal plane directed
from the front towards the rear of the
vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the front
occupant of the vehicle and the dashboard
to cushion their forward movement.
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop to have the
system checked.
Front airbag fault
If the two airbag warning lamps are
on continuously, do not install a rear-
facing child seat. Contact a PEUGEOT or a
qualified workshop.
9
7
Child safety
SAFETY
4
GENERAL POINTS RELATING TO
CHILD SEATS
"Rearwards-facing"
Recommended on the rear seats up to the
age of 2.
When a "rearwards-facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, it
is essential that the passenger airbag is
deactivated. Otherwise, the child would risk
being seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were to inflate.
"Forwards-facing"
Recommended on the rear seats over the
age of 2.
When a "forwards-facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, leave
the passenger airbag activated.
CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
The rules for carrying children are specific to
each country. Consult the current legislation
in your country.
Please consult the list of seats approved
in your country. The Isofix mountings, the
rear seats, the passenger airbag and the
deactivation of this airbag depend on the
version sold.
Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria
when designing your vehicle, the safety of
your children also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please follow these
precautions:
- all children under the age of 12 or less
than one metre fifty tall must travel in
approved child seats suited to their
weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or
ISOFIX mountings,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for the transportation of children
are the rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "rearwards-facing" position
both in the front and in the rear,
- the passenger must not travel with a
child on his lap.
9
8
Child safety
The child seats function and the
passenger's airbag deativation function
are common to the entire PEUGEOT range.
If the passenger's airbag is not deactivated,
the installation of a "rearwards-facing" child
seat in the front is strictly prohibited.
Refer to chapter 4, "Airbags" section.
Passenger airbag OFF
Label present on both sides of the
passenger's sun visor
AR
BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това можеда причини СМЪРТ или
СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpečí
SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.
DE Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE
VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.
EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε
μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ
αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN ASIENTO
PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE O HERIRLO
GRAVEMENTE.
ET Ärge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas sõiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib põhjustada
lapsele RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.
FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen
voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal
ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo
uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL
van védve. Ez a gyermek halálát vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO.
Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO PAGALVĖS.
Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
LV NAV PIE
ĻAUJAMS uzstādīt uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera vietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
99
Child safety
SAFETY
4
MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan
het KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.
NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET
risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji «tyłem do kierunku jazdy»na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ POWIETRZNĄ
w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko narażone będzie na ŚMIERĆ lub BARDZO POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA CIAŁA w momenicie
wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej
PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta
instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal
ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье, защищенном
ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или
НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK NIKDY nepoužívajte na prednom sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM detské zadržiavacie zariadenie umiestnené v proti smere jazdy. Môže
to spôsobiť SMRŤ, alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIEŤAŤA.
SL NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem AKTIVIRANA.
Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti
SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA skador på
barnet.
TR KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya ÇOK AĞIR
YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
100
Child safety
10
1
Child safety
SAFETY
4
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt :
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
L1
"ROMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rear-facing position.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age of 6 years (approximately 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fixed on the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
10
2
Child safety
(a): Group 0: from birth to 13 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(b): consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
U: seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved, "rear facing" and/or "forward facing".
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS ATTACHED USING THE SEAT BELT
This table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved in accordance with the weight of
the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Seat
Weight of the child and indicative age
Under 13 kg
(groups 0 (a)
and 0+)
Up to approx 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
1 to 3 years
approx
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
3 to 6 years
approx
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
6 to 10 years
approx
Row 1 (b)
Individual seat U U U U
Bench, outer seat U U U U
Bench, centre
seat
L1 - L4, L5 L4, L5
10
3
Child safety
SAFETY
4
ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection in
the event of an accident.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in
relation to the child's body to a minimum ,
even for short journeys.
For optimum installation of the "forward
facing" child seat, ensure that the back of
the child seat is in contact with the back of
the vehicle's seat and that the head restraint
does not cause any discomfort.
If the head restraint has to be removed,
ensure that it is stored or attached securely
to prevent it from being thrown around the
vehicle in the event of sharp braking.
Children under the age of 10 must not travel
in the "forward facing" position on the front
passenger seat, unless the rear seats are
already occupied by other children, cannot
be used or are absent.
Deactivate the passenger's airbag when a
"rear facing" child seat is installed on the
front seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
use the "Child Lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of
the sun, fit side blinds to the rear windows.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
PEUGEOT recommends the use of a
booster seat which has a back, fitted with a
seat belt guide at shoulder level.
104
Towing a trailer
For more information about weights,
refer to the administrative documents
(registration document, ...) or to the
"Weights" section of chapter 8.
TOWING A TRAILER, CARAVAN, BOAT, ETC...
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest objects are as close as possible
to the axle and the nose weight is close to
the maximum authorised without, however,
exceeding it.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
coolant temperature.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its
cooling capacity is not dependent on the
engine speed.
Driving advice
A towed vehicle must free wheel: gearbox in
neutral.
105
Towing a trailer
A
CCESSORIE
S
5
You should therefore use a high gear to
lower the engine speed and reduce your
speed.
In all cases, pay attention to the coolant
temperature.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle (see the "Identification markings"
section of chapter 8) and of the trailer,
observing the recommended pressures.
Towbar
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses,
which have been tested and approved from
the design stage of your vehicle, and that
you entrust the fitting of this equipment to a
PEUGEOT dealer.
If this equipment is not fitted by a PEUGEOT
dealer, it is imperative that it is fitted using
the electrical pre-equipment installed at the
rear of the vehicle and in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
In accordance with the general instructions
a reminder of which has been given above,
we draw your attention to the risk associated
with fitting a towbar or electrical accessory
not recommended by PEUGEOT. Fitting
such equipment could result in the failure
of your vehicle's electronic system. Please
obtain information from the Manufacturer
before fitting this type of equipment.
See the "Levels" section of chapter 6.
Good Practice
In certain cases of particularly arduous
use (towing the maximum load up a steep
slope in high temperatures), the engine
automatically limits its power. In this
case, the air conditioning is automatically
cut off to save engine power.
If the coolant temperature warning
lamp comes on, stop the vehicle
and switch off the engine as soon
as possible.
Brakes
Towing increases the braking distance. Drive
at a moderate speed, change down early
and brake gradually.
Side wind
Sensitivity to side wind is increased. Drive
smoothly and at a moderate speed.
ABS/DSC
The ABS or DSC systems only control the
vehicle, not the trailer or caravan.
Rear parking sensors
The parking sensors system does not
function while the vehicle is towing.
106
Equipment
OTHER ACCESSORIES
For any work on your vehicle, use
a qualified workshop that has the
technical information, competence and
equipment required, which a PEUGEOT
dealer is able to provide.
ROOF BARS
Maximum load: 100 kilograms.
ROOF RACK
To install the transverse roof bars, use the
fixings provided for this purpose.
Maximum load : 170 kilograms.
INTERIOR RACK
This rack allows you to carry long items of low weight (electrical conduits, pipes, etc...).
Accessory not available on
the H2 version.
Accessory not available on the
H2 version.
10
7
Equipment
A
CCESSORIE
S
5
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in the failure of your vehicle's electronic
system. Please note this specific warning.
You are advised to contact a representative
of the Marque to be shown the range of
recommended equipment and accessories.
Depending on the country in which the
vehicle is sold or operated, it is compulsory
to have a high visibility safety vest, warning
triangle and replacement bulbs available in
the vehicle.
Front mud flaps, rear mud flaps, ....
Installation of radiocommunication
transmitters
Before installing accessory
radiocommunication transmitters with an
external aerial on your vehicle, you are
advised to contact a representative of the
PEUGEOT marque.
The PEUGEOT dealer network can inform
you of the specifications (frequency
band, maximum output power, aerial
position, specific installation conditions)
of the transmitters which can be fitted,
in accordance with the Motor Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/CE).
Screenwash, replacement fuses, wiper
blades, interior and exterior cleaning
and maintenance products, replacement
bulbs, ...
To prevent the mat from becoming caught
under the pedals:
- ensure that the mat and its fi xings are
positioned correctly,
- never fi t one mat on top of another.
Audio equipment, hands-free kit, speakers,
CD changer, navigation, ...
Regardless of the audio and telematic
equipment offered on the market, the
technical constraints linked with the fi tting of
equipment of these families of products mean
that the special features of the equipment and
its compatibility with the capacities of the your
vehicle's standard equipment must be taken
into account. Please contact a dealer for
information before fi tting such equipment.
Range of trade equipment
Parts and Services technical information
publishes an accessory catalogue offering
various equipment and fittings, such as:
Roof bars for short, medium and long
wheelbase (load retainers for all models).
Sill plate, loading roller, sill. Sill plate,
loading roller, sill.
Towbar, towbar harness: trailer towbar which
must be fitted by the network.
Roof bars for the various heights, roof bars,
ladder.
Separation partitions and grilles, smooth,
non-slip wooden protective floor.
Protective grilles, multimedia.
Another range is also available, structured
around comfort, leisure and maintenance:
Anti-theft alarm, window engraving, first aid
kit, high visibility safety vest, rear parking
sensors, warning triangle,
Front seat covers compatible with airbags,
bench, rubber mats, carpet mats, snow
chains.
10
8
Opening the bonnet
OPENING THE BONNET
From inside:
- lift the cover located at the foot of the
front left seat.
- pull the release lever upwards.
To close
Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its
travel. Check that the bonnet is properly latched.
From outside: partially open the bonnet, lift
the safety catch and raise the bonnet.
Bonnet stay
Secure the stay in one of the two notches,
according to the height required, to hold the
bonnet open.
Before closing the bonnet, replace the stay
in its housing.
"Bonnet open" warning
This warning is linked to the alarm option
only.
With the engine running or the
vehicle moving, a warning lamp
and a diagram in the screen,
accompanied by an audible
signal, warn you that the bonnet
is not properly closed.
10
9
Under the bonnet
CHECK
S
6
DIESEL ENGINES
8 - Power steering reservoir.
9 - Removable towing eye.
10 - Priming pump
( a : 1.6 litre HDi; b : 2 litre HDi).
11 - Engine oil filling funnel (2 litre HDi).
7.1 - Engine oil filler cap.
If your vehicle is fitted with this oil filler tube,
proceed as follows:
A - Remove the oil filler cap.
B - Remove the filler tube from its location.
C - Place the filler tube in the filler opening
as shown on the illustration.
D - Turn it a 1/4 of a turn to the left to lock it
then top up the oil.
To refit, proceed in the reverse order without
forgetting to retighten the cap A correctly.
UNDER THE BONNET
1 - Screen/headlamp wash reservoir.
2 - Fusebox.
3 - Coolant header tank.
4 - Brake and clutch fluid reservoir.
5 - Air filter.
6 - Engine oil dipstick.
7 - Engine oil filler cap.
110
Under the bonnet
PETROL ENGINE
4. Brake and clutch fluid reservoir.
5. Air filter.
6. Engine oil dipstick.
7. Engine oil filler cap.
8. Power steering reservoir.
9. Removable towing eye.
1. Screen/headlamp wash reservoir.
2. Fusebox.
3. Coolant header tank.
11
1
Levels
CHECK
S
6
LEVELS
control systems, the use of additives in
engine oil is prohibited.
Changing the brake fluid
The brake fluid must be changed at
the intervals stated, according to the
manufacturer's servicing schedule.
Use fluids recommended by the
manufacturer, which fulfil DOT4 standards.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the reservoir.
If fluid has to be added frequently, this
indicates a fault which must be checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.
Warning lamps
These regular maintenance operations
will keep your vehicle in good running
order. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or the
servicing and warranty booklet enclosed in
the handbook pack.
If you have to remove / refit the engine
style cover, handle it with care to avoid
damaging the fixing clips.
Oil level
Check the level regularly and top up
between changes.
Check the level with the vehicle level,
engine cold, using the dipstick.
Dipstick
There are two marks on the
dipstick:
A = maximum
If you fill past this mark,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
B = minimum
Never allow the level to fall
below this mark.
To maintain the reliability of
engines and emission
Oil change
It is imperative that this is carried out at the
intervals specified and the viscosity grade of
the oil selected must fulfil the requirements
in accordance with the manufacturer's
servicing schedule. Ask for advice from a
PEUGEOT dealer.
Remove the dipstick before filling.
For the 2 litre HDi engine, use the funnel
supplied when filling via the sump opening.
Check the level after filling (never exceed
the max mark).
Screw the cap back onto the sump before
closing the bonnet.
Viscosity selection
In all cases, the oil selected must meet the
manufacturer's requirements.
Checking by means of the warning
lamps in the instrument panel
is described in chapter 2, refer to the
"Instruments and controls" section.
112
Levels
Cooling system
Only use the fluid recommended by the
manufacturer.
Otherwise, you risk seriously damaging your
engine.
When the engine is warm, the temperature
of the coolant is controlled by the engine
fan. As this fan can operate with the ignition
key removed and because the cooling
system is pressurised, wait for at least one
hour after the engine has stopped before
carrying out any work.
Slacken the cap by 1/4 of a turn to release
the pressure to prevent any risk of scalding.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level with coolant.
If fluid has to be added frequently, this
indicates a fault which must be checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as
soon as possible.
Power steering fluid level
The vehicle must be parked on level ground
with the engine cold. Unscrew the cap
integrated with the gauge and check the
level which must be between the MIN and
MAX marks.
When this occurs with the engine running it
is due to the start of saturation of the particle
emission filter (exceptionally prolonged
urban type driving conditions: low speed,
long traffic jams, ...).
In order to regenerate the filter, you are
advised to drive at a speed higher than
40 mph (60 km/h) for at least five minutes
as soon as possible, when traffic conditions
permit (until the message disappears and
the service warning lamp goes off).
During regeneration of the particle emission
filter, relay noise may be heard under the
dashboard.
If the message is still displayed and if the
service warning lamp remains on, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Topping up
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks on the expansion bottle. If
more than 1 litre of fluid is required to top
up the level, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Screenwash and headlamp wash
level
For best quality cleaning and for your safety,
we would advise that you use products of
the PEUGEOT range.
Capacity of the screenwash reservoir:
approximately 4.5 litres.
If your vehicle is fitted with headlamp
washers, the capacity of the reservoir is
7.5 litres.
To ensure optimum cleaning and prevent
freezing, this fluid must not be topped up or
replaced with plain water.
Diesel additive level (Diesel
with particle emission filter)
The minimum level of this additive
is indicated by lighting of the
service warning light, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
Checks
CHECK
S
6
CHECKS
Battery
At the start of winter, have your battery
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Brake pads
Brake pad wear depends on the style of
driving, in particular for vehicles which are
used in town, over short distances. It may
be necessary to check the thickness of the
pads, even between services.
Unless there is a leak in the system, a drop
in the brake fluid level indicates that the
brake pads are worn.
Brake disc / drum wear
For any information on checking the brake
disc / drum wear, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Parking brake
Where the parking brake travel is too great
or there is a reduction in the performance
of the system, the parking brake should be
adjusted, even between services.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Oil filter
Change the filter regularly, in accordance
with the servicing schedule.
Carbon filter and passenger
compartment filter
The carbon filter permits continuous and
effective filtering of dust.
If the passenger compartment fi lter becomes
clogged, this may reduce the performance of the air
conditioning system and generate unpleasant odours.
We recommend the use of a combined
passenger compartment filter. By means of
its second special active filter, it contributes
to the purification of the air breathed by
the occupants and the cleanness of the
passenger compartment (reduction of
allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and
greasy deposits).
Refer to the servicing and warranty booklet to fi nd
out the replacement interval for these components.
Depending on the environment (dusty
atmosphere...) and the use of the vehicle
(urban driving...), change them twice as
often if necessary.
Particle emission filter (Diesel)
This filter actively contributes
to the preservation of air quality
by trapping unburnt polluting
particles. It is controlled
completely and automatically by the engine
management system.
This warning lamp comes on if there is a risk
of blockage of the filter.
This alert signals the start of saturation of
the particle emissions filter (exceptionally
prolonged driving in urban conditions:
reduced speed, traffic jams…).
If this alert persists, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
On acceleration after the vehicle has been
running for a prolonged period at very low
speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional
circumstances, notice the emission of water
vapour at the exhaust. This water vapour
does not have any adverse effect on vehicle
handling or the environment.
To regenerate the filter, it is recommended
that as soon as driving conditions permit,
you drive at a speed of at least 36 mph
(60 km/h) for at least 5 minutes (until the
warning lamp goes off and/or the message
disappears).
Refer to "Under the bonnet" in section 6.
114
Checks
Manual gearbox
Have the level checked in accordance with
the manufacturer's servicing schedule.
To check the main levels and certain
components, in accordance with the
manufacturer's servicing schedule, refer
to the pages of the servicing and warranty
booklet which correspond to your vehicle's
engine.
Only use products recommended by
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of units as
important as the braking system, PEUGEOT
selects and offers specific products.
In order to avoid damaging the electrical
units, high pressure washing to clean the
engine compartment is strictly prohibited.
After washing the vehicle dampness, or in
winter, ice may form on the brake discs and
pads: braking efficiency may be reduced.
Make some light brake applications to dry
and de-ice the brakes.
Bleeding the water contained in the
Diesel filter
If this warning lamp comes on,
bleed the filter. Otherwise bleed
regularly each time the engine oil
is changed.
To evacuate the water, unscrew the bleed
screw located on the end of the transparent
pipe.
Operate until all of the water in the
transparent pipe has been drained out then
tighten the bleed screw.
HDi engines use advanced technology.
Contact a PEUGEOT or a qualified
workshop for all work on the system.
1.6 litre HDi
2 litre HDi
During this regeneration, you may notice
that the idling speed is higher than normal
and that the cooling fan is running. As
operation of the exhaust emissions controls
may cause the exhaust gas temperature to
reach very high levels, it is recommended
that you do not stop the vehicle over easily
inflammable surfaces (dry grass and leaves,
pine needles, edge of a meadow or forest).
115
Maintenance with TOTAL
CHECK
S
6
RECOMMENDS
PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE AND
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
Innovation at the service of performance
The TOTAL Research and Development
teams develop lubricants for PEUGEOT which
satisfy the requirements of the latest technical
innovations incorporated in PEUGEOT vehicles.
This ensures that you obtain the best
performance and the maximum engine life.
Reduced exhaust emissions
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the
efficiency of engines and the protection of the
emissions post-treatment systems. It is crucial to
observe the servicing recommendations made by
PEUGEOT to ensure correct operation.
116
Fuel
FILLING WITH FUEL
Filling with fuel
The fuel tank must be filled with the engine
off .
Low fuel level
When this warning lamp fi rst comes
on and when the needle is at the
start of the red zone, the minimum
fuel tank level has been reached.
At this moment, you have approximately
8 litres of fuel remaining.
Fill up without delay to avoid running out of fuel.
When filling with fuel, do not open the
left-hand side door, if fitted on your
vehicle, as there is a risk of damage to the
fuel filler flap.
- Open the fuel filler flap.
Insert the key, then turn it a quarter turn.
- Remove the cap and hook it onto the
clip located on the inside of the flap.
It is normal to hear the noise of an inrush
of air when the cap is opened as there is a
vacuum caused by the sealing of the fuel
system.
A label affixed to the inside of the flap
reminds you of the type of fuel to be used.
More than 8 litres of fuel must be added in
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
When filling the fuel tank, do not continue
after the 3 rd cut-off of the nozzle. This could
cause malfunctions.
The capacity of the fuel tank is
approximately 80 litres.
- After filling the fuel tank, lock the cap
and close the flap.
Never continue to drive until you run
out of fuel as this may damage the
emission control and injection systems.
DIESEL
11
7
Fuel
CHECK
S
6
FUEL CUT-OFF
DIESEL PRIMING PUMP
If you should run out of fuel, it is necessary
to prime the circuit:
- fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
diesel,
- squeeze and release the manual priming
pump, under the bonnet under the
protective cover, until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe,
- operate the starter until the engine
starts.
In a serious collision, a mechanism
automatically prevents fuel from reaching
the engine.
The flashing of this warning lamp
is accompanied by a message in
the screen.
Check that there is no odour or leakage of
fuel outside the vehicle and re-establish the
fuel supply:
- switch off the ignition (STOP position),
- remove the key,
- put the key back in the ignition,
- switch on the ignition and start.
Quality of the fuel used for petrol
engines
Quality of the fuel used for Diesel
engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible
with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels
(containing 10 % or 24 % ethanol),
conforming to European standards EN 228
and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 %
ethanol) are reserved exclusively for
vehicles marketed for the use of this type
of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of
the ethanol must comply with European
standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are
marketed to run on fuels containing up to
100 % ethanol (E100 type).
The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible
with biofuels which conform to current
and future European standards (Diesel
fuel which complies with standard EN 590
mixed with a biofuel which complies with
standard EN 14214) available at the pumps
(containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in certain
Diesel engines; however, this use is subject
to strict application of the special servicing
conditions. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
11
8
Fuel
DIESEL PRIMING BUTTON
If you should run out of fuel, it is necessary
to prime the system using the priming
button:
- fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel fuel,
- open the bonnet,
- unclip the protective cover for access to
the priming push button,
- place the cover to the right of the
engine,
- firmly squeeze and release the manual
priming pump until fuel stiffens the pipe,
- operate the starter until the engine
starts,
- place the two slots in the lugs behind the
engine to allow the protective cover to
be refitted,
- clip the protective cover in place,
- close the bonnet.
If the engine does not start first time,
do not keep trying.
Operate the priming push button again,
then start the engine.
Battery
QUICK HELP
7
BATTERY
This is housed in a compartment located
underneath the fl oor, in front of the front right seat.
Before disconnecting the battery, you must
wait for 2 minutes after switching off the
ignition.
Never disconnect a terminal when the
engine is running.
Never charge a battery without first
disconnecting the terminals.
After every reconnection of the battery,
switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute
before starting to allow the electronic
systems to be initialised. If some problems
persist after this operation, please contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is not to be used for a
period of more than one month.
To charge the battery using a battery
charger
- Disconnect the battery,
- Follow the instructions for use given by
the battery charger manufacturer,
- Reconnect starting with the negative (-)
terminal,
- Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with
sulphate (white or greenish deposit),
disconnect them and clean them.
To start the vehicle from another
battery
- Connect the red cable to the positive (+)
terminals of the two batteries,
- Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
slave battery,
- Connect the other end of the green or
black cable to an earth point on the
broken down vehicle as far as possible
from the battery,
- Operate the starter, let the engine run,
- Wait for the engine to return to idle, then
disconnect the cables.
The presence of this label indicates
the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery
with special technology and specification,
for which the involvement of a PEUGEOT
dealer or qualified workshop is required
when replacing or disconnecting the battery.
Failure to observe this recommendation may
cause premature ageing of the battery.
120
Battery
ECONOMY MODE
After the engine has stopped, with the key
in the ignition position, certain functions
(windscreen wiper, electric windows, courtesy
lamps, audio equipment, etc.) can only
be used for a cumulative duration of thirty
minutes, to prevent discharging of the battery.
Once the thirty minutes are over, the active
functions are put on standby and the battery
warning lamp flashes accompanied by a
message in the screen.
To resume the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run
for a few minutes.
The time available will then be double the
time for which the engine was left running.
However, this time will always be between
five and thirty minutes.
A flat battery will prevent the engine from
starting.
12
1
Repairing a wheel
QUICK HELP
7
PUNCTURE REPAIR KIT
The kit is located at the left hand rear of the
vehicle.
The temporary puncture repair kit consists
of a compressor and a cartridge (containing
a sealant).
Using the kit
- switch off the ignition,
- affix the speed limitation sticker to the
vehicle's steering wheel to remind you
that a wheel is in temporary use,
- check that the switch A is at position " 0 ",
- connect the pipe of the bottle 1 to the
valve of the tyre to be repaired,
- connect the compressor's electrical plug
to the vehicle's 12V socket,
- start the vehicle and let the engine run,
- switch on the compressor by pressing
the switch A to position " 1 " until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars,
- remove the compressor, unclip and
store the bottle in a sealed bag to avoid
staining your vehicle with traces of fluid,
- drive immediately, for approximately
two miles (three kilometres), at reduced
speed (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to seal the puncture,
- stop to check the repair and the
pressure,
Vehicles supplied with a temporary
puncture repair kit do not have a spare
wheel or tooling (jack, wheelbrace, ...).
If, after approximately five to ten
minutes, you are not able to obtain
this pressure, the tyre cannot be
repaired; contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop for roadside
assistance.
122
Repairing a wheel
- adjust the pressure using the
compressor (to inflate: switch A in
position " 1 "; to deflate: switch A in
position " 0 " and press button B ), in
accordance with the vehicle's tyre
pressure label (located on the door
aperture, on the driver's side), then
remember to check that the leak has
been sealed correctly (no further
loss of pressure after several miles
(kilometres)),
- remove the compressor, then stow the
complete kit,
- drive at reduced speed (50 mph (80 km/h)
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 125 miles (200 km),
- visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have
the tyre repaired or replaced by a
technician.
- connect the compressor pipe directly to
the valve of the repaired wheel.
- connect the compressor's electrical plug
to the vehicle's 12V socket again,
- start the vehicle again and let the engine
run,
Warning, the sealant cartridge contains
ethylene-glycol, this product is harmful
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes. Keep this product out of reach of
children.
The expiry date of the sealant is indicated
under the cartridge.
The cartridge is intended for a single use;
once opened, it must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge into
the environment, take it to a PEUGEOT
dealer or to a specialised waste disposal
site.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
12
3
Changing a wheel
QUICK HELP
7
CHANGING A WHEEL
If your vehicle is equipped with a spare
wheel located underneath the vehicle, follow
these instructions.
1. PARKING THE VEHICLE
- You must ensure that the occupants
get out of the vehicle and wait in a safe
location.
- If possible, park the vehicle on level,
stable and non-slippery ground.
- Apply the parking brake, switch off the
ignition and engage first or reverse gear.
- If available, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the one to be
changed.
On certain types of ground and/or if heavy
loads are being transported, the vehicle
must be raised in order to disengage
the spare wheel from the carrier. Call a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If your vehicle is fitted with suspension
with pneumatic height correction,
please deactivate the system. Refer to the
"Rear suspension" section of chapter 3.
2. TOOLS
- If fitted on your vehicle, open the
plastic flap located at the rear left of the
vehicle.
- Unscrew the nut then take out the jack
and the wheelbrace.
1. Wheelbrace.
2. Jack.
3. Towing eye.
The jack and the tool kit are specific to
your vehicle. Do not use them for other
purposes.
124
Changing a wheel
- Open the cover, located on the sill, to
access the carrier bolt.
- Unscrew the bolt using the wheelbrace
until the carrier is lowered fully.
- Detach the carrier from the hook and
place the spare wheel near the wheel to
be changed.
3. SPARE WHEEL
- Gain access to the spare wheel from the
rear.
- Open the rear doors.
You can switch on the courtesy lamp to
improve visibility.
125
Changing a wheel
QUICK HELP
7
4. OPERATING PROCEDURE
- Place the jack in contact with the
locating point provided, the one which is
closest to the wheel to be changed.
Ensure that the jack is straight and that
the base of the jack is fully in contact
with the ground.
- Extend the jack to lift the wheel clear of
the ground.
- Resume and complete the unscrewing of
the wheel bolts.
- Remove the bolts and remove the
wheel.
- Remove the trim pulling it using the
towing eye.
- Loosen the wheel bolts and start
unscrewing them.
Do not extend the jack until you have
started unscrewing the bolts on the
wheel to be changed and have placed the
chock under the wheel diagonally opposite.
Changing a wheel
- Lower the vehicle completely by folding
the jack, then remove the jack.
- Tighten the bolts again using the
wheelbrace, tighten them fully without
forcing them.
- Place the wheel to be repaired in the
carrier.
- Secure the carrier on the hook then
raise the carrier using the bolt and the
wheel brace. Check that the wheel and
the carrier are flush against the floor of
the vehicle.
- Remember to close the flap, located on
the sill.
- Store the trim in the vehicle.
Never go underneath the vehicle when
it is supported only by the jack.
Never use a screwdriver in place of the
wheelbrace.
5. FITTING THE SPARE WHEEL
- Position the wheel on the hub and start
tightening the wheel bolts by hand.
- Carry out an initial tightening of the bolts
using the wheelbrace.
12
7
Snow screen
QUICK HELP
7
REMOVABLE SNOW SCREEN
According to country, the removable snow
screen is installed on the lower part of the
front bumper to prevent the accumulation of
snow at the radiator cooling fan.
FITTING
- Offer up the snow screen facing its
centring pin A on the front bumper.
- Put it in place by pressing at each clip B
located in the four corners.
Do not forget to remove the snow screen
when the exterior temperature is higher than
10°C (no risk of snowfall) and when towing.
REMOVAL
- Pass a screwdriver into the hole located
near each of the clips.
- Use the screwdriver as a lever to unclip
the four clips B in turn.
6. REFITTING THE REPAIRED
WHEEL
The wheel is refitted as described in step 5,
not forgetting to refit the wheel trim.
Refer to the "Identification markings"
section of chapter 8 to locate the tyre
label.
The spare wheel is not designed to
be used over long distances. Have
the tightening of the bolts and the tyre
pressure checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Also, have the original wheel repaired and
refitted by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
12
8
Snow chains
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve
traction as well as the behaviour of the
vehicle when braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only to
the driving wheels. They must never be
fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force
in your country on the use of snow
chains and the maximum running speed
authorised.
Advice on installation
) If you have to fit the chains during
a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat
surface on the side of the road.
) Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of
your vehicle.
) Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
) Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
) Stop your vehicle and check that the
snow chains are correctly tightened.
Avoid driving on roads that have been
cleared of snow, to avoid damaging
your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. It
is recommended that before you leave, you
practise fitting the snow chains on a level
and dry surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain
or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to
the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Maximum link size.
215/65 R15
12 mm
215/60 R16
MICHELIN
215/60 R16
BRIDGESTONE
For more information on snow chains,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
12
9
Changing a bulb
QUICK HELP
7
CHANGING A BULB
Type A
All glass bulb: pull
gently as it is fitted by
pressure.
Type B
Bayonet bulb: press
on the bulb then turn it
anticlockwise.
Type C
Halogen bulb: release
the retaining spring from
its housing.
TYPES OF BULB
Various types of bulb are installed on your vehicle. To remove them:
Halogen bulbs must be changed after
the headlamp has been off for several
minutes (risk of serious burns). Do not touch
the bulb directly with your fingers, use lint-
free cloths.
When each operation has been completed,
check the operation of the lighting.
1
3
0
Changing a bulb
3. Direction indicators
Type B , PY21W - 21W (amber)
- Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
anticlockwise.
- Remove the bulb by pressing it lightly
while turning it anticlockwise.
- Change the bulb.
- Ensure that the cover is refitted
correctly all the way round to ensure
sealing.
FRONT LAMPS
Open the bonnet. To access the bulbs, reach
behind the headlamp unit.
Carry out the operations in reverse order to
refit each bulb.
1. Dipped / Main beam headlamps
Type C , H4 - 55W
- Remove the centre cover by pulling
the flexible rubber tab.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Release the retaining spring.
- Change the bulb taking care to align
the metal part with the slots in the
lamp.
2. Sidelamps
Type A , W5W - 5W
- Remove the cover by pulling the
flexible rubber tab.
- Remove the bulb holder fitted by
pressure by pulling the connector.
- Change the bulb.
- Ensure that the cover is refitted
correctly all the way round to ensure
sealing.
4. Foglamps
Type C , H1 - 55W
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
1
31
Changing a bulb
QUICK HELP
7
DIRECTION INDICATOR SIDE
REPEATER
Type A , WY5W - 5W (amber)
- Push the repeater towards the rear and
disengage it.
- Support the connector and turn the bulb
holder a quarter turn to the left.
- Turn the bulb a quarter turn to the left,
remove it and change it.
- When refitting, engage the repeater
towards the rear and bring it towards the
front.
Front / Rear
Amber coloured bulbs (direction indicators
and side repeaters) must be replaced with
bulbs of identical specification and colour.
COURTESY LAMPS
Type A , 12V 5W - 5W
- Unclip the lens by sliding a screwdriver
in the slots on each side of the courtesy
lamp.
- Pull the bulb and change it.
- Clip the lens in its housing and ensure
that it is secured correctly.
High pressure jet washing
When using this type of jet washer
on stubborn dirt, do not persist on the
headlamps, the lamps and their surrounds to
avoid damaging their coating and seals.
1
32
Changing a bulb
REAR LAMPS
For more information on bulbs, refer to the
"Types of bulb".
- Identify the faulty bulb then open the
rear doors to 180°. Refer to the "Access"
section of chapter 2.
- Remove the two fixing nuts.
Pull the lens unit from the outside.
- Holding the lamp unit, disconnect the
electrical connector.
- Move aside the 8 tabs then extract the
bulb holder.
- Remove the failed bulb by pressing it
lightly while turning it anticlockwise.
- Change the bulb.
1. Brake lamps / sidelamps
Type B , P21/5W - 21/5W
2. Direction indicators
Type B , PY21W - 21W (amber)
3. Reversing lamps
Type B , P21W - 21W
4. Foglamps
Type B , P21W - 21W
When refitting, take care to correctly
reposition:
- the 8 tabs,
- the two white lugs in the two rubber
holes to maintain the sealing of the lamp
unit,
- the supply wire to avoid trapping it.
1
33
Changing a bulb
QUICK HELP
7
THIRD BRAKE LAMP
Type A , W5W - 5W
NUMBER PLATE LAMPS
Type A , W5W - 5W
Lamp located on the inside (tailgate)
- Unscrew the two screws using a Torx
TM
20 screwdriver.
- Remove the plastic cover.
- Remove the bulb holder moving aside
the two tabs.
- Remove the failed bulb by pressing it
lightly while turning it anticlockwise.
- Change the bulb.
Type B , P21W - 21W
With tailgate
- Move aside the plastic lens using a
screwdriver, on the point indicated by
the arrow.
- Change the bulb.
- Replace the plastic lens and press on it.
With hinged doors
- Unclip the interior trim.
- Disconnect the connector by moving
aside its tab.
- Remove the plastic cover.
- Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn
anticlockwise.
- Change the bulb.
Lamp located on the outside (hinged doors)
- Unscrew the two screws using a Torx
TM
20 screwdriver.
- Remove the lamp.
- Change the bulb.
Type B , P21W - 21W
Lamp on door top
- Remove the screws using an 8 mm
spanner.
- Remove the failed bulb by pressing it
lightly while turning it anticlockwise.
- Change the bulb.
1
3
4
Changing a fuse
CHANGING A FUSE
The three fuseboxes are placed:
-
in the dashboard on the right-hand side (behind
the storage compartments, retractable),
- in the passenger compartment (battery
compartment),
- under the bonnet.
If fi tted on your vehicle, a further fusebox
is added for towing, the towbar and the
connections for the coachbuilder and platform
cab conversions. It is located on the right
behind the load retaining partition.
Removing and fitting a fuse
Before changing a fuse, the cause of the
fault must be found and rectified.
Always replace a failed fuse with a fuse
of the same rating.
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying the malfunctions
resulting from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance
with its instructions, in particular when
the combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected exceeds
10 milliamperes.
The descriptions communicated are only the
fuses which can be changed by the user.
For any other operations, go to a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
For motor trade use: for complete
fuse and relay information, consult the
"Repair procedure" wiring diagrams via the
dealer network.
1
3
5
Changing a fuse
QUICK HELP
7
RIGHT-HAND SIDE DASHBOARD
FU
S
E
S
- Tilt the storage compartment then pull it
firmly to access the fuses.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 15 Rear wiper
2 - Free
3 5 Airbag control unit
4 10
Steering wheel angle sensor, Diagnostic socket, DSC
sensor, Manual ventilation, Clutch switch, Headlamp beam
height, Particle emission filter pump
5 30 Electric mirrors, Passenger electric window motor
6 30 Front electric windows supply
7 5 Courtesy lamps and glove box lamp
8 20
Multifunction screen, Anti-theft alarm siren, Audio
equipment, Compact disc changer, Audio/telephone, Trailer
fusebox (accessory), Coachbuilder/vehicle converter unit
(platform cab)
9 10 Load space accessory socket
10 30
Rear ride height corrector, Steering wheel switching,
Instrument panel
11 15 Diagnostic socket, Ignition switch
12 15
Hands-free kit, Airbag control unit, Parking sensors control
unit
13 5 Engine fusebox, Trailer fusebox
14 15 Rain sensor, Digital air conditioning, Instrument panel
15 30 Locking/unlocking/deadlocking
16 - Free
17 40 Heated rear screen, Heated mirrors
17 10 Heated mirrors only
1
3
6
Changing a fuse
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
FUSES
- Unclip the battery compartment cover.
- Remove the red battery terminal (+).
When you have finished, close the cover
carefully.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 30 Heated seats
2 20/- Battery state of charge unit/Free
3 40/50
Trailer fuse box (accessory) / Coachbuilder/vehicle modifier
unit (platform cab)
4 - Free
36 15 Hinged door locks
37 10 Hinged door locks
38 20 Hinged door rear wiper
39 - Free
40 5 Folding door mirrors
1
37
Changing a fuse
QUICK HELP
7
FUSES UNDER THE BONNET
- After opening the bonnet, slide the
screenwash support to make access
easier.
- Unclip and tilt the box to access the
fuses.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 20
Engine control unit, Fuel supply and air supply systems,
Fan assembly
2 15 Horn
3 10 Front and rear screenwash pump
4 20 Headlamp wash pump
5 15 Fuel supply system
6 10 Power steering, Secondary brake pedal switch
7 10 Braking system (ABS/DSC)
8 20 Starter motor control
9 10 Main brake pedal switch
10 30
Fuel supply and air supply systems, Emissions control
systems
11 40 Front ventilation
12 30 Windscreen wipers
13 40 Built-in systems interface
14 30 Free
1
38
Changing a fuse
TOWING / TOWBAR /
COACHBUILDERS / PLATFORM
CAB FU
S
E
S
The descriptions communicated are an
indication only as this additional box relates
to other information which depends on the
coachbuilder/vehicle converter for which this
document cannot act as a technical support.
Fuses
F
Amperes
A
Allocation
1 15 Free
2 15 Ignition relay and optional generator
3 15 Trailer 12V supply
4 15 Permanent supply for vehicle converters
5 10 Hazard warning lamps
1
39
Changing a wiper blade
QUICK HELP
7
Placing the windscreen wiper blades
in the special position
- Less than a minute after switching
off the ignition, press the wiper stalk
downwards to position the wiper blades
along the windscreen pillars (special
position).
Changing a front wiper blade
- Lift the wiper arm.
- Unclip the blade and remove it.
- Fit the new blade.
- Push back the wiper arm.
Changing the rear wiper blade
- Lift the wiper arm, then unclip the blade
and remove it.
- Fit the new blade and push back the
wiper arm.
CHANGING A WIPER BLADE
To return the windscreen wipers to their
normal position, switch on the ignition and
operate the wiper stalk.
140
Having your vehicle towed
Without lifting (4 wheels on the
ground)
You should always use a towing bar.
From the front
- Unclip the cover by pressing at the
bottom,
- Fully screw in the removable towing eye.
TOWING THE VEHICLE
Lifting (2 wheels on the ground only)
It is preferable to lift the vehicle using
professional lifting equipment.
From the rear
- Unclip the cover using a coin or the flat
part of the towing eye,
- Fully screw in the removable towing eye.
Vehicles fitted with a manual
gearbox (Diesel version)
In the case of vehicles fitted with a manual
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the
neutral position. Failure to observe this
special condition may result in damage
to certain braking components and the
absence of braking assistance the next time
the engine is started.
14
1
Having your vehicle towed
QUICK HELP
7
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle
is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The person at the wheel of the towed vehicle
must have a valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off,
there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call
on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
fast road,
- 4 wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the
gearbox into neutral, unlock the
steering, or release the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towing bar
available...
142
Dimensions
Dimensions
T
E
C
HNI
C
AL DAT
A
8
* Value for rear suspension.
L1 L2
H1 H1 H2
L Overall length 4 805 to 4813 5 135 to 5 143
H Overall height 1894 * / 1942 2 204 * / 2 276
A Wheelbase 3 000 3122
B Front overhang 975
C Rear overhang 830 to 838 1038 to 1046
D
Overall width:
over panels 1 870
with mouldings 1 895
with mirrors folded 1 986
with mirrors unfolded 2 194
E Width of front track 1 562 to 1 570
F Width of rear track 1 596 to 1 604
I Length of interior floor 2 254 2 584
J Maximum interior height under roof 1 449 1 750
K Maximum interior width 1 600
M Interior width between wheel arches 1 245
Turning circle between kerbs (m) 12.18 12.59
Maximum loads (kg)
Payload 1 000 to 1 200
On roof 170
m
3
5 6 7
DIMENSIONS
(
MM
)
The vehicle is available in 2 lengths (L1, L2) and 2 heights (H1, H2),
refer to the tables:
144
Dimensions
REAR DOORS (mm)
L1 L2
H1 H1 H2
N Usable height 1 272 1 630
O Usable width 1 237
Dimensions
T
E
C
HNI
C
AL DAT
A
8
SLIDING SIDE DOOR (mm)
L1 L2
H1 H1 H2
P Height 1 293 1 301
Q Width 924
146
Dimensions
14
7
Dimensions
T
E
C
HNI
C
AL DAT
A
8
PLATFORM CAB (mm)
L2
L Overall length 5 016
A Wheelbase 3 122
B Front overhang 975
C Rear overhang 920
Max rear body overhang 1 420
D Overall width (excluding mirrors) 1 895
E Width of front track 1 574
F Width of rear track 1 574
- Gross vehicle weight -
- Max weight at the front 1 400
- Max weight at the rear 1 700
14
8
Weights
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS
(
KG
)
For further information, refer to your registration certificate.
In each country, it is imperative that the towed loads permitted by local legislation are complied with. To find out your vehicle's towing
capabilities and its gross train weight, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
Load transfer
If the towing vehicle has not reached the GVW, it is possible to transfer this weight to the trailer.
In all cases, do not exceed the weight of the trailer and the GTW, indicated on your registration certificate.
Observe the towing capacities of your vehicle.
The weight of a braked trailer with load transfer can be increased on condition that the equivalent weight is removed from the vehicle and
the GTW is not exceeded.
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine. If the ambient temperature is
above 37 °C, limit the towed load to 700 kg, without any transfer of load.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
14
9
T
E
C
HNI
C
AL DAT
A
8
150
Identification markings
IDENTIFICATION MARKING
S
A. Manufacturer's label.
1 - VF Type serial number.
2 - Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
3 - Gross train weight (GTW).
4.1 - Maximum weight on front axle.
4.2 - Maximum weight on rear axle.
B. Model serial number.
Use the flat end piece of the towing eye to
open the flap.
C. Tyres and paint colour code.
The label C , on the front door gives:
- the wheel and tyre sizes,
- the brands of tyres recommended by the
manufacturer,
- the tyre pressures (the tyre pressures
must be checked when the tyres are
cold, at least once a month),
- the paint colour code.
9
.
1
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
9
.
2
E
MERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
In an emer
g
enc
y
, press this button for more than
2
seconds. Flashin
g
of the
g
reen LED and a voice
messa
g
e con
fi
rm that the call has been made to the
PEU
G
E
O
T
CO
NNE
C
T
SOS
call centre
*
.
The
g
reen LED remains on
(
without
fl
ashin
g)
when communication is
e
stablished. It
g
oes o
ff
at the end o
f
communication.
Wh
en t
h
e
ig
n
i
t
i
on
i
s sw
i
tc
h
e
d
on, t
h
e
g
reen
LED comes on
f
or 3 seconds indicatin
g
that
t
h
e s
y
stem
i
s operat
i
n
g
correct
ly
.
Pressin
g
this button a
g
ain immediatel
y
cancels the request.
The cancellation is confi rmed b
y
a voice messa
g
e.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
ass
i
s
t
a
n
ce
if th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
b
r
ea
k
s
do
wn.
A
voice messa
g
e con
fi
rms that the call has been made
**
.
OPERATION OF THE SYSTEM
Pressin
g
this button a
g
ain immediatel
y
cancels the request. The
g
reen
L
ED
g
oes off. Cancellation is confi rmed b
y
a voice messa
g
e
To cancel a call, tell the PEUGE
O
T C
O
NNECT S
O
S call centre that the
call
w
as
a
m
is
t
ake
.
PEUGE
O
T C
O
NNECT S
O
S immediatel
y
locates
y
our vehicle, starts
c
ommunication with
y
ou in
y
our lan
g
ua
g
e ** , and where necessar
y
sends
the appropriate public emer
g
enc
y
services ** . In countries where the
s
erv
i
ce
i
s not ava
il
a
bl
e, or w
h
en t
h
e
l
ocat
i
n
g
serv
i
ce
h
as
b
een express
ly
declined, the call sent directl
y
to the emer
g
enc
y
services
(
112
)
without the
v
e
hi
c
l
e
l
oca
ti
o
n .
If an impact is detected b
y
the airba
g
control unit, and
independentl
y
of the deplo
y
ment of an
y
airba
g
s, an emer
g
enc
y
call
is made automaticall
y
.
* Sub
j
ect to the
g
eneral conditions for the service available from dealers
a
nd to technolo
g
ical and technical limitations.
**
Dependin
g
on the
g
eo
g
raphical cover o
f
PEU
G
E
O
T
CO
NNE
C
T
SOS
,
PEU
G
E
O
T
CO
NNE
C
T A
SS
I
S
TAN
C
E and the o
ffi
cial national lan
g
ua
g
e
s
elected by the owner o
f
the vehicle.
Th
e
li
s
t
of
cou
ntri
es
co
v
e
r
ed
a
n
d
PE
UG
E
O
T
CO
NNE
C
T
se
rvi
ces
a
r
e
a
vailable
f
rom dealers or at www.peu
g
eot.co.uk.
If the oran
g
e LED fl ashes: there is a s
y
stem
f
au
lt.
If the oran
g
e LED is on continuousl
y
: the
b
ac
k
up
b
atter
y
must
b
e rep
l
ace
d
.
In either case, contact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer.
I
f
you purchased your vehicle outside the PEU
G
E
O
T dealer network,
we invite
y
ou to have a dealer check the con
fi
g
uration o
f
these services
and, i
f
desired, modi
fi
ed to suit
y
our wishes. In a multi-lin
g
ual countr
y
,
c
on
fi
g
uration is possible in the o
ffi
cial national lan
g
ua
g
e o
f
y
our choice.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the qualit
y
o
f
P
EU
G
E
O
T
CO
NNE
C
T services to customers, the manu
f
acturer reserves
t
h
e r
igh
t to carr
y
out up
d
ates to t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e
'
s on-
b
oar
d
te
l
emat
i
c s
y
stem.
9
.
3
The s
y
stem is protected in such a wa
y
that it will onl
y
operate
i
n
y
our ve
hi
c
l
e.
01 First steps - Control panel
For safet
y
reasons, the driver must carr
y
out operations
which require prolon
g
ed attention while the vehicle is
s
tationar
y
.
When the en
g
ine is switched o
ff
and to prevent
dischar
g
in
g
o
f
the batter
y
, the s
y
stem switches o
ff
f
ollowing the activation o
f
the energy economy mode.
CONTENT
S
02 General o
p
eration
03 Steerin
g
mounted controls
04 Audio settin
g
s
05 Navi
g
ation - Guidance
06 Traffic information
07 Usin
g
the telephone
0
8
Radio
09 Music media pla
y
ers
10 Confi
g
uration
11 Tri
p
com
p
ute
r
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
9
.
4
9
.
6
9
.
8
9
.
9
9.
1
0
9
.2
3
9.27
9.
3
8
9
.
4
2
9.
4
8
9.
5
1
P
EUGEOT CONNECT NAVIGATION
(
RT6
)
12 Screen menu ma
p
p
.
9.
5
2
Frequentl
y
asked questions
p
.
9.
5
6
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE AUDIO
SYSTEM
9
.4
01
FIRST STEPS
Access
t
o
t
he
" Navigation - guidanc
e
"
m
enu and displa
y
the
r
ece
nt
des
tin
a
ti
o
n
s
.
Short
p
ress without the
e
n
g
ine runnin
g
: on / off.
S
hort press with the en
g
ine
runnin
g
: audio source o
ff
/
r
esto
r
e
.
S
hort press: select pre-set
rad
i
o
s
t
a
ti
o
n.
Lon
g
press: pre-set the
cu
rr
e
nt
s
t
a
ti
o
n.
MODE button:
S
election o
f
the
type o
f
permanent display.
Lon
g
press: black screen
(
DARK
)
.
A
ccess
t
o
th
e
"
M
USI
C
" menu, and displa
y
of the
C
D/MP3/A
pp
le
®
tracks and folders.
®
Lon
g
press: displa
y
the audio settin
g
s screen for the
"
MEDIA
(
CD/USB/iPod/Streamin
g
/AUX
)
" sources.
L
on
g
press: open t
h
e
"
A
u
di
o sett
i
n
g
s" menu: music ambience, bass, treble, loudness, left/ri
g
ht
balance,
f
ront
/
rear
f
ader, automatic volume ad
j
ustment.
A
ccess
t
o
th
e
" RADIO " m
e
n
u
a
n
d
displa
y
the list of stations received.
Lon
g
press: displa
y
the audio settin
g
s
sc
r
ee
n f
o
r th
e
r
ad
i
o
t
u
n
e
r
sou
r
ce
.
S
election and confi rmation
O
K dial:
S
election o
f
an item on the screen or in
a
list or a menu, then con
fi
rmation with a
s
hort press.
O
ther than
f
or menus and lists, a short
press displa
y
s a contextual menu
dependin
g
on the current screen.
Rotation with map displa
y
ed: zoom the
map sca
l
e
i
n an
d
out.
Volume ad
j
ustment
(
each
source is independent,
includin
g
TA messa
g
es and
navi
g
ation instructions
)
.
9
.
5
01
S
elect:
- the next lower / hi
g
her radio frequenc
y
automaticall
y
.
- the previous
/
next
C
D track, MP3 track or media.
- the le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht o
f
the screen when a menu is displa
y
ed.
Move le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht in "Move the ma
p
" m
ode
.
Aba
n
do
n th
e
cu
rr
e
nt
operation, up one level in
t
he
m
e
n
u
.
L
on
g
press: return to t
h
e
p
ermanent display.
Continuous
p
ress:
reinitialisation of the s
y
stem.
O
pen the
"
T
elephon
e
" m
e
n
u
and displa
y
the list o
f
r
ecent calls or accept
an
i
ncom
i
n
g
ca
ll
.
O
pen the
"
Confi
g
uration " m
e
n
u
.
L
on
g
press: access
to the GPS covera
g
e
a
nd the navi
g
ation
de
m
o
n
s
tr
a
t
io
n m
ode
.
O
pen the "
T
raffi c
i
nformation
"
m
e
n
u
a
n
d
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
cu
rr
e
nt tr
affi
c
a
l
e
rt
s
.
S
elect:
- the previous
/
next line in a list or menu.
- the previous
/
next media
f
older.
- step b
y
step selection of the previous/next radio frequenc
y
.
- the previous / next MP3 folder.
Move up/down, in "
M
ove t
h
e ma
p
"
m
ode
.
FIRST STEPS
9
.
6
02
For a detailed
g
lobal view o
f
the menus available, re
f
er to the
"
S
creen menu map" section.
For cleanin
g
the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(
spectacles cloth
)
is recommended, with no additional product.
"RADIO "
"
T
ELEPHON
E
"
(
I
f
conversation in pro
g
ress
)
SETUP: PARAMETER
S
date and time, display con
fi
guration, sound.
C
han
g
in
g
the audio source:
R
ADI
O
: RADI
O
broadcasts.
M
U
S
I
C
: pla
y
in
g
MU
S
I
C
.
Pr
ess
th
e
M
OD
E
button several times in succession
f
or access to the
f
ollowin
g
displa
y
s:
GENERAL OPERATION
"
FULL SCREEN MA
P
"
"
M
AP IN WINDO
W
"
(
I
f
navi
g
ation
g
uidance in
p
ro
g
ress
)
9
.
7
02
A
press on t
h
e
di
a
l
gi
ves access to
sh
ort-cut menus accor
di
n
g
to t
h
e
di
sp
l
a
y
i
n t
h
e screen.
GENERAL OPERATION
D
ISPLAY ACCORDING TO CONTEXT
RADIO:
Activate / Deactivate T
A
Activate / Deactivate RDS
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,
CD or USB
(
accordin
g
to
m
edia
)
:
Pla
y
modes:
Normal
Random
R
an
d
om on a
ll
me
di
a
R
e
p
et
i
t
i
on
TELEPHONE
(
call in
pro
g
ress
)
:
Private mode
FULL SCREEN MAP OR IN
A
NEW WINDOW:
Stop / Restore
g
uidance
Select destination
E
nter an a
dd
ress
D
irector
y
G
PS coordinate
s
Divert route
M
ove t
h
e ma
p
Info. on location
S
elect as destination
Select as sta
ge
Save this place
(
contacts
)
Quit ma
p
mod
e
Guidance criteria
Put call on hold
DTMF
r
i
n
g
tones
Hang up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Chan
g
e waveband
F
M
AM
2
2
1
T
A
1
9
.
8
03 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
RADI
O
: select the previous
/
next preset
s
t
a
t
io
n.
S
elect the next entr
y
in the address book.
Chan
g
e the audio source.
S
tart a call from the address book.
C
all
/
End call on the telephone.
Pr
ess
fo
r m
o
r
e
th
a
n 2
seco
n
ds
:
access
t
o
th
e
add
r
ess
boo
k.
RADI
O
: chan
g
e to the previous radio
s
t
a
ti
o
n in th
e
li
s
t.
Lon
g
press: automatic search for a
lower frequenc
y
.
C
D: select the previous track.
C
D: continuous press:
f
ast reverse.
RADI
O
: chan
g
e to the next radio station
in th
e
li
s
t.
Lon
g
press: automatic search for a
h
i
g
her
f
requenc
y
.
C
D: select the next track.
C
D: continuous press:
f
ast
f
orward pla
y
.
V
o
l
u
m
e
in
c
r
ease
.
V
o
l
u
m
e
dec
r
ease
.
M
ute: press t
h
e vo
l
ume
i
n
c
r
ease
a
n
d
dec
r
ease
b
uttons s
i
mu
l
taneous
ly
.
Restore the sound by
p
ressin
g
one o
f
the two
v
o
l
u
m
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
.
9
.
9
04
A
UDIO SETTINGS
The
y
are accessible b
y
the
M
U
S
IC
button in the control panel or b
y
a lon
g
p
ress on RADI
O
accordin
g
to the source
in
use
.
- "
Eq
ualize
r
" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
r
- " Bass"
-"Trebl
e
"
-"Loudness"
(
Activate/Deactivate
)
-
"
Di
str
ib
ut
i
on"
(
"
Driver
", "
r
All
passen
g
er
s
"
)
-
"
Le-
Ri
b
a
l
anc
e
"
(
Le
f
t
/
Ri
g
ht
)
- " Fr-Re balanc
e
"
(
Front
/
Rear
)
- "
A
uto. Volum
e
" dependin
g
on road speed
(
Activate
/
Deactivate
)
The audio settings
(
Equalizer
,
r
Bas
s
,
T
rebl
e
a
n
d
L
oudness
)
are
di
ff
erent and independent
f
or each sound source.
The settin
g
s for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
The distribution
(
or spatialisation usin
g
the Arkam
y
s
©
system) of sound
©
i
s an au
di
o process t
h
at a
ll
ows t
h
e au
di
o qua
li
t
y
to
b
e a
d
apte
d
to t
h
e
n
u
m
be
r
of
li
s
t
e
n
e
r
s
in th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
.
9
.1
0
05
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
gg
gg
gg
gg
gg
Navigation
guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation - guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
Navigation guidance
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
N i ti id
Ni i id
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
To delete the list of recent destinations, select "
G
uidance
o
p
tions" in the navi
g
ation menu then select "
D
elete last
d
est
i
nat
i
ons
" and confi rm. Select "
Yes
" th
e
n
co
nfi rm.
D
e
l
et
i
n
g
j
ust one
d
est
i
nat
i
on
i
s not poss
ibl
e.
Go from the list to the menu
(
left/ri
g
ht
)
.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "NAVIGATION" menu
Pr
ess
NAV
.
o
r
C
ontact a PE
UG
E
O
T
dealer for mappin
g
up
d
ates.
A short press on the end o
f
the
li
g
htin
g
control stalk repeats
the last navi
g
ation messa
g
e.
9
.1
1
05
NAV
to displa
y
the
"
N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
anc
e
"
m
e
n
u
.
TOWARDS A NEW DESTINATION
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION
S
elect "Select destination "
a
n
d
c
onfi rm, then select "
E
nter an address"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect the "
C
ountr
y
"
fu
n
c
ti
o
n th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "
T
own" f
u
n
c
ti
o
n th
e
n
co
nfi rm t
o
e
nt
e
r th
e
des
tin
a
ti
o
n t
o
wn.
S
elect the letters in the name of the
town one at a time, con
fi
rmin
g
each one
w
i
t
h
t
he
dial
.
S
election the town
f
rom the list o
ff
ered, then con
fi
rm
A
pre-set list
(
by entering the
fi
rst
f
ew letters
)
o
f
the towns in the country selected
c
an be accessed directl
y
b
y
selectin
g
and con
fi
rmin
g
"
List
"
o
n th
e
sc
r
ee
n.
t
Tu
rn t
he
dial
a
n
d
selec
t
"
OK
"
t
he
n
co
n
fi
rm.
If possible, enter the "
R
oad "
a
n
d
"N°
/X
"
information in the same wa
y
.
Se
l
ec
t "Archiv
e
" t
o
sa
v
e
th
e
add
r
ess
e
nt
e
r
ed
in
a
co
nt
ac
t
fi
l
e
.
The s
y
stem allows up to 400 contact
fi
les to be recorded.
C
on
fi
rm " OK " to start guidance.
S
elect the
g
uidance criteria: "
F
astest
rout
e
"
,
"
S
hortest rout
e
"
or opt
i
m
i
se
d
"
D
istance
/
Tim
e
", then select the
des
ir
ed
r
es
tri
c
ti
o
n
c
rit
e
ri
a
: "With tolls",
"
With Ferr
y
", or "
T
raffi c info" th
e
n
co
nfi rm "OK".
9
.1
2
05
SELECTING A DESTINATION
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
TO ONE OF THE RECENT DESTINATIONS
P
r
ess
NAV
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
"
N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
anc
e
"
m
e
n
u
.
S
elect the desired destination and
c
onfi rm to start
g
uidance.
TOWARDS A CONTACT IN THE CONTACTS DIRECTORY
S
elect " Select destination"
a
n
d
c
onfi rm
,
then select "
Di
rector
y
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
Se
l
ec
ti
o
n th
e
des
ir
ed
des
tin
a
ti
o
n
f
r
o
m
y
our contacts and confi rm " OK " t
o
s
t
a
rt
the
g
uidance.
Pr
ess
NAV to displa
y
the
"
Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
Navi
g
ation towards a contact imported
f
rom
y
our telephone is onl
y
possible i
f
the address is compatible with the system.
Dele
t
e
t
he
r
ece
nt
des
t
i
n
a
t
io
n
s
:
-
P
r
ess
o
n
"
NAV
"
.
-
S
elect "
G
uidance options" and con
fi
rm.
-
Se
l
ec
t "D
e
l
e
t
e
l
as
t
des
tin
a
ti
o
n
s
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
9
.1
3
05
Se
l
ec
t "
S
elect destination"
a
n
d
c
on
fi
rm, then select " GPS coordinate
s
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
Enter the
G
P
S
coordinates and confi rm
"
O
K
"
to start t
h
e
g
u
id
ance.
Pr
ess
NAV to displa
y
the
"Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
T
OWARDS GPS COORDINATES TOWARDS A POINT ON THE MAP
With the map displa
y
ed, press
O
K t
o
displa
y
the contextual menu.
S
elect
"
Move the map "
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
Pr
ess
OK to displa
y
the contextual
m
e
n
u
fo
r "
M
ove the ma
p
" m
ode
.
S
elect " Select as destination "
or
"
Select as sta
ge
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
Move the cursor usin
g
the control to
identif
y
the desired destination.
9
.1
4
05
TOWARDS POINTS OF INTEREST
(
POI
)
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The points o
f
interest
(
P
O
I
)
indicate all o
f
the service locations in the vicinit
y
(
hotels, various businesses, airports...
)
.
S
elect the "
E
nter an a
dd
ress "
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
and con
fi
rm, then select Select
destination
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
To select a P
O
I close to your current
l
ocation, select "POI" and con
fi
rm, then
se
l
ec
t "
A
round the current
p
lac
e
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
To select a P
O
I as a sta
g
e on the route,
se
l
ec
t " PO
I
" and confi rm, then select " On
t
h
e rout
e
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
To select a P
O
I as a destination,
fi
rst
e
nter the country and town
(
see "Towards
a new destination"
)
, select "POI"
a
n
d
c
on
fi
rm,
fi
nall
y
select "
Near
" and confi rm.
r
Search for P
O
Is in the cate
g
ories
su
gg
ested in the followin
g
pa
g
es.
S
elect " Search b
y
Nam
e
" to search for P
O
Is b
y
name and not b
y
p
roximit
y
.
Se
l
ec
t th
e
P
O
I
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm " O
K
" t
o
s
t
a
rt
the
g
uidance.
Pr
ess
NAV to displa
y
the
"Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
9
.1
5
05
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST
(
POI
)
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
This icon appears when several P
O
Is are
g
rouped
to
g
ether in the same area. Zoomin
g
in on this icon
s
hows details of the P
O
Is.
*
Accordin
g
to availabilit
y
in the
c
ountr
y
.
The detailed procedure
f
or updatin
g
P
O
Is can be
f
ound at "http:
//
peu
g
eot.navi
g
ation.com".
9
.1
6
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ALERT PARAMETERS
R
ISK AREAS
S
elect:
- "Vi
sua
l
a
l
e
rt"
- "A
ud
i
b
l
e
a
l
e
rt"
-
"Al
ert on
ly
i
n
g
u
id
ance
"
- "
O
verspeed alarm onl
y
".
Th
e
c
h
o
i
ce
of
tim
e
of
n
o
ti
fi
ca
ti
o
n
defi
n
es
h
ow lon
g
in advance that Risk area
warnin
g
s are
g
iven.
S
elect " OK " t
o
co
nfi rm th
e
sc
r
ee
n.
S
elect "
G
uidance o
p
tions " and con
fi
rm,
th
e
n
se
l
ec
t "Set
p
arameters for risk
areas
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
These
f
unctions are onl
y
available i
f
risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the s
y
stem.
The detailed procedure for updatin
g
risk area P
O
Is can be found at
www.peu
g
eot.com.
P
r
ess
NAV
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
"
N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
anc
e
"
m
e
n
u
.
9
.1
7
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ADDING A STAGE
Pr
ess
NAV
to displa
y
the
"
Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
Se
l
ec
t "
J
ourne
y
le
g
and rout
e
" th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect " Close t
o
" a route passin
g
c
lose to the sta
g
e or " Stric
t
" f
o
r
a
r
ou
t
e
pass
i
n
g
t
h
rou
gh
t
h
e sta
g
e.
C
on
fi
rm " OK
"
to start t
h
e
g
u
id
ance, an
d
g
ive a
g
eneral indication o
f
the
g
uidance
r
oute
.
S
elect "Add a stag
e
" th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm
The address o
f
the sta
g
e is entered as
a destination, b
y
"
E
nter an address",
a
co
nt
ac
t in "
D
irector
y
", or "
P
revious
d
estinations"
.
ORGANISING STAGES
To or
g
anise sta
g
es, carr
y
out operations
1 to 2 a
g
ain, then select " Order/delete
j
ourne
y
le
g
s"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect and confi rm to save the
m
od
ifi
ca
ti
o
n
s
.
S
elect the sta
g
e that
y
ou want to move
in th
e
o
r
de
r.
Se
l
ec
t "
D
elet
e
" to delete the sta
g
e.
9
.1
8
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ROUTE OPTIONS
CALCULATION CRITERIA
S
elect " Guidance o
p
tion
s
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect " OK "
a
n
d
co
nfi rm t
o
sa
v
e
th
e
m
od
ifi
ca
ti
o
n
s
.
S
elect "
D
efi ne calculation criteri
a
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
Thi
s
f
u
n
c
ti
o
n
a
ll
o
w
s
m
od
ifi
ca
ti
o
n
o
f:
- the
g
uidance criteria:
(
"
F
astest
rout
e
", "
S
hortest rout
e
",
"
D
istance
/
Tim
e
"
)
,
- the exclusion criteria:
(
" With tolls"
o
r "With Ferr
y
"
)
,
- traffi c avoidance:
(
"
T
raffi c inf
o
"
)
.
P
r
ess
NAV
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
"
N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
anc
e
"
m
e
n
u
.
I
f
tra
ffi
c avoidance
(
Tra
ffi
c in
f
o
)
is selected, the s
y
stem su
gg
ests
an alternative route if there is a dela
y
on the
g
uidance route.
9
.1
9
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Pr
ess
NAV to display the
"Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
MAP MANAGEMENT
S
ELECTING THE POINT
S
OF INTERE
S
T DI
S
PLAYED ON THE
MAP
S
elect "
M
ap mana
g
emen
t
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect
f
rom the various cate
g
ories the
ones that
y
ou want to displa
y
on the
sc
r
ee
n.
Se
l
ec
t "Ma
p
details"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "
By
defaul
t
" to have onl
y
"Oil stations,
g
ara
g
es"
a
n
d
"
Accident-
p
rone are
a
" appear on the map
(
if installed in the
s
y
stem
)
.
S
elect " OK " th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm
a
n
d
se
l
ec
t
"
O
K
" a
g
ain then con
fi
rm to save the
m
od
i
fi
ca
ti
o
n
s
.
9
.2
0
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
S
elect "
M
ap mana
g
emen
t
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect:
-
"
V
e
hi
c
l
e
di
rect
i
on
"
to
h
ave t
h
e map
f
ollow the direction o
f
travel,
- "North direction" to keep the map
alwa
y
s North up,
-"Perspective view " to displa
y
a
p
erspective view.
Se
l
ec
t "Ma
p
orientation "
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
The colour o
f
the map, di
ff
erent
f
rom the day and night mode, is
c
on
fi
g
ured in the "
S
ETUP" m
e
n
u
.
MAP ORIENTATION
Pr
ess
NAV to displa
y
the
" Navi
g
ation -
g
uidanc
e
" m
e
n
u
.
S
treet names are visible on the map
f
rom the 100 m scale.
9
.2
1
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
P
r
ess
NAV
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
"
N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
anc
e
"
m
e
n
u
.
ADJUSTING THE GUIDANCE SPEECH SYNTHESIS
S
elect " Guidance o
p
tion
s
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME/DEACTIVATION
S
elect " Set speech synthesis"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect the volume
g
raph and con
fi
rm.
S
elect "
D
eact
i
vat
e
"
to
d
eact
i
vate vo
i
ce messa
g
es.
S
elect " OK
"
an
d
press t
h
e
di
a
l
to
co
n
fi
rm.
A
d
j
ust the volume to the desired level
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
The volume o
f
messages can be adjusted during the transmission
of
the messa
g
e usin
g
the volume ad
j
ustment control.
The volume settin
g
o
f
g
uidance messa
g
es is also accessible via the
"
S
ETU
P
"
/
"
V
oice synthesi
s
" m
e
n
u
.
9
.2
2
05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
MALE VOICE / FEMALE VOICE
P
r
ess
SETU
P
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
c
on
fi
g
uration menu.
Se
l
ec
t "
S
elect male voic
e
"
o
r "
S
elect
f
emale voic
e
" then confi rm "
Yes
" t
o
ac
tiv
a
t
e
a
m
a
l
e
o
r f
e
m
a
l
e
v
o
i
ce
. Th
e
sy
stem restarts.
S
elect "
V
o
i
ce s
y
nt
h
es
i
s "
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
9
.2
3
06
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Access to the "TRAFFIC INFORMATION" menu
G
o
f
rom the list to the menu
(
le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht
)
.
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
a c o at o
Traffi
c
information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Traffic information
Tffi if ti
Tffi if ti
Tffi if ti
Tffi if ti
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
o
r
P
r
ess
"
T
RAFFI
C
".
9
.2
4
06 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES
TM
C
(
Tra
ffi
c Messa
g
e
C
hannel
)
messa
g
es contain in
f
ormation on tra
ffi
c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the
driver in the
f
orm o
f
audible announcements and s
y
mbols on the navi
g
ation map.
The navi
g
ation s
y
stem can then su
gg
est an alternative route to avoid a traffi c problem.
Pr
ess
th
e
T
RAFFI
C
button to displa
y
the
T
raffi c information m
e
n
u
.
Se
l
ec
t th
e
"
Geographic fi lter
"
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
r
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
The s
y
stem o
ff
ers a choice o
f
:
- " Retain all the messa
g
es",
o
r
-"Retain the messa
g
e
s
"
●
"
A
roun
d
t
h
e ve
hi
c
le
",
(
confi rm
the milea
g
e to modi
fy
and select
the distance
)
,
● " On the rout
e
".
C
onfi rm " OK " t
o
sa
v
e
th
e
m
od
ifi
ca
ti
o
n
s
.
We
r
eco
mm
e
n
d
:
-
a
fi
lt
e
r
o
n th
e
r
ou
t
e
a
n
d
-
a
fi
lt
e
r
a
r
ou
n
d
th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
of
:
- 12 miles
(
20 km
)
in urban areas,
- 30 miles
(
50 km
)
on motorwa
y
s.
9
.2
5
06 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS
Red and
y
ellow trian
g
le: tra
ffi
c in
f
ormation,
f
or example:
Black and blue trian
g
le:
g
eneral information, for example:
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
The TA
(
Traffi c Announcement
)
function
g
ives priorit
y
to TA alert
m
essa
g
es. To operate, this function needs
g
ood reception of a
r
adio station transmittin
g
this t
y
pe of messa
g
e. When a traffi c report
is transmitted, the current audio source
(
Radio,
C
D, U
S
B, ...
)
is
i
nterrupte
d
automat
i
ca
lly
to p
l
a
y
t
h
e
TA
messa
g
e.
N
orma
l
p
l
a
yb
ac
k
of
th
e
aud
i
o
sou
r
ce
r
esu
m
es
a
t th
e
e
n
d
of
th
e
tr
a
n
s
mi
ss
i
o
n
of
th
e
message
.
Pr
ess
R
ADIO to displa
y
the "FM
/
AM
b
an
d
"
m
e
n
u
.
S
elect " Guidance o
p
tion
s
" th
e
n
co
nfi rm.
A
c
tiv
a
t
e
o
r
deac
tiv
a
t
e
"
TA
" th
e
n
co
nfi rm.
The volume settin
g
for TA messa
g
es can be ad
j
usted onl
y
durin
g
the
transmission of this t
y
pe of alert.
A
ctivate or deactivate the
f
unction at any time by pressing the button.
Durin
g
a messa
g
e, press the button to interrupt it.
9
.2
6
9
.2
7
07
USING THE TELEPHONE
Access to the "TELEPHONE" menu
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
p
p
p
p
eepoe
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Telephone
Tl h
Tl h
Tl h
Tl h
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
G
o
f
rom the list to the menu
(
le
f
t
/
right
)
.
or
P
r
ess
PHON
E
.
To make a call, select a number in the list and con
fi
rm "OK
"
t
o
s
t
a
rt th
e
ca
ll.
C
onnecting a di
ff
erent telephone deletes the list o
f
rece
nt
ca
ll
s
.
No telephone connected.
Tele
p
hone connected.
Incomin
g
call.
O
ut
g
oin
g
call.
S
y
nchronisation
of
add
r
ess
boo
k in
p
ro
g
ress.
Tele
p
hone call in
p
ro
g
ress.
In the top bar of the permanent
d
ispla
y
9
.2
8
07
PAIRING A BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
FIRST CONNECTION
For reasons of safet
y
and because the
y
require prolon
g
ed attention
on the part o
f
the driver, the operations
f
or pairin
g
the Bluetooth
m
obile telephone to the hands-
f
ree s
y
stem o
f
the audio unit must be
ca
rri
ed
ou
t with th
e
v
ehicle stationar
y
.
A
ct
i
vate t
h
e te
l
ep
h
one
'
s
Bl
uetoot
h
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
a
n
d
e
n
su
r
e
th
a
t it i
s
"
s
h
o
wn t
o
a
ll"
(
telephone con
fi
guration
)
.
Pr
ess
thi
s
bu
tt
o
n.
S
elect the name o
f
the desired
peripheral
f
rom the list o
f
devices
de
t
ec
t
ed
th
e
n
se
l
ec
t "Connec
t
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
The s
y
stem offers to connect the
tele
p
hone:
-
in
"
H
ands-free mod
e
"
(
telephone
o
nl
y)
,
-
in "
A
u
di
o" mode
(
streamin
g
: pla
y
in
g
music
fi
les on the telephone
)
,
-
o
r "All "
(f
or selection o
f
both
modes
)
.
S
elect " OK "
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
S
elect "
B
luetooth functions
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "Peripherals search"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
The list of peripherals detected is
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
.
W
a
i
t unt
il
t
h
e
"
Connec
t
"
bu
tt
o
n
is
a
v
ailable
.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk
f
or more in
f
ormation
(
compatibility,
additional help, ...
)
.
9
.2
9
07
E
nter t
h
e same co
d
e on t
h
e te
l
ep
h
one t
h
en accept
t
he
co
nn
ec
t
io
n.
Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the
te
l
ep
h
one to reconnect automat
i
ca
lly
ever
y
t
i
me t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e
i
s
s
t
a
rt
ed
.
The abilit
y
o
f
the s
y
stem to connect in onl
y
one mode depends on
the telephone. The two modes ma
y
both connect b
y
de
f
ault.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Th
e
"Hands-free mod
e
" should be used in pre
f
erence i
f
"S
treamin
g
" is not desired.
The services available depend on the network, the
S
IM card and the compatibility o
f
the Bluetooth telephone used.
C
heck the telephone
m
anual and with
y
our network provider
f
or details o
f
the services available to
y
ou.
S
elect a code for the connection then
co
nfi rm "OK
".
Dependin
g
on the t
y
pe of telephone, the s
y
stem will ask
y
ou to
accept or not the transfer of
y
our contacts.
O
n return to the vehicle,the last telephone connected
automaticall
y
reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
s
witchin
g
on the i
g
nition
(
Bluetooth activated and visible
)
.
To modif
y
the automatic connection mode, remove the pairin
g
an
d
pa
i
r t
h
e te
l
ep
h
one a
g
a
i
n w
i
t
h
t
h
e
d
es
i
re
d
mo
d
e.
9
.
30
07 USING THE TELEPHONE
DIRECTORY / SYNCHRONIZING CONTACTS
P
r
ess
PHON
E
t
he
n
selec
t
"
Contacts
managemen
t
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "New contac
t
" t
o
e
nt
e
r
a
n
e
w
co
nt
ac
t.
S
elect "Sort by Name/First nam
e
" t
o
c
hoose the order in which the
y
appear.
S
elect "
D
e
l
ete a
ll
contacts
"
t
o
dele
t
e
t
h
e contacts save
d
i
n t
h
e s
y
stem.
S
election "S
y
nchronization options"
:
- No s
y
nchronization: onl
y
the
c
ontacts save
d
i
n t
h
e s
y
stem
(
alwa
y
s present
)
.
- Display telephone contacts: only the
c
ontacts saved in the telephone.
- Displa
y
S
IM card contacts: onl
y
the
c
ontacts saved on the
S
IM card.
- Displa
y
all phone contacts:
c
ontacts on the
S
IM card and in the
te
l
ep
h
one.
S
elect "
I
m
p
ort all the entries" to import
all the contacts in the telephone and
s
ave them in the s
y
stem.
O
nce im
p
orted, a contact remains visible
whatever tele
p
hone is connected.
S
elect "Contact mem. status
"
t
o
see
t
he
n
umber o
f
contacts saved in the s
y
stem
o
r imported, and the
f
ree memory.
9
.
31
07
MANAGING CONTACTS
Pr
ess
P
HON
E
th
e
n
se
l
ec
t "
D
irector
y
of
c
ontacts"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect the desired contact and confi rm.
S
elect " Im
p
or
t
" to cop
y
one contact to
t
h
e s
y
stem.
S
elect " Call" t
o
s
t
a
rt th
e
ca
ll.
S
elect " O
p
en " t
o
vi
e
w
a
n
e
xt
e
rn
a
l
co
nt
ac
t
or modif
y
a contact saved in the s
y
stem.
S
elect OK
S
elect "
D
elet
e
" t
o
de
l
e
t
e
a
co
nt
ac
t
sa
v
ed
i
n t
h
e s
y
stem.
It is necessar
y
to import an external contact to modif
y
the record.
It will be saved in the s
y
stem. It is not possible to modi
fy
or delete
c
ontacts in the telephone or the
S
IM card via the Bluetooth
co
nn
ec
ti
o
n.
USING THE TELEPHONE
or
press the back button to exit this menu.
Delete the addresses saved in the director
y
o
f
contacts:
-
P
r
ess
o
n
P
HONE .
-
S
elect "Director
y
o
f
contacts".
-
S
elect "Displa
y
contacts" and con
fi
rm, then select the address.
-
S
elect "Delete" and confi rm.
(
This operation must be carried out contact b
y
contact
)
.
9
.
32
07 USING THE TELEPHONE
Pr
ess
P
HON
E
twi
ce
.
S
elect "
Di
a
l
" th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "
D
irectory of contacts" th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
Dial the telephone number usin
g
the
virtual ke
y
pad selectin
g
each number
i
n t
u
rn.
C
on
fi
rm " OK
"
t
o
m
ake
t
he
call
.
Pr
ess
TEL
o
r twi
ce
o
n
P
HON
E
.
CALLING A NEW NUMBER CALLING A CONTACT
S
elect the desired contact and con
fi
rm.
I
f
access
w
as
vi
a
th
e
P
HON
E
b
utton,
se
l
ec
t "Cal
l
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect the number and con
fi
rm to start
th
e
ca
ll.
M
AKING A CALL
Use o
f
the telephone is not recommended while drivin
g
. We
r
ecommended that
y
ou park sa
f
el
y
or make use o
f
the steerin
g
mou
nt
ed
co
ntr
o
l
s
.
9
.
33
07 USING THE TELEPHONE
CALLING A RECENTLY ENTERED NUMBER
Pr
ess
TEL
, select "Call lis
t
"
a
n
d
c
onfi rm,
S
elect the desired number and con
fi
rm.
To erase the calls lo
g
, press
P
HONE twice, select "
P
hone
f
unctions"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm th
e
n
se
l
ec
t "
D
elete calls lo
g
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
ENDING A CALL
P
r
ess
P
HON
E
t
he
n
selec
t
"
O
K
"
t
o
e
n
d
t
he
call
.
O
r make a lon
g
press on
T
EL
a
t th
e
steerin
g
mounted controls.
O
r make two short
p
resses on
T
E
L
a
t
the steerin
g
mounted controls.
O
r
p
ress the MODE button, as man
y
times as necessar
y
, until the telephone
screen
i
s
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
.
p
ress
P
HONE to displa
y
the calls lo
g
.
or
P
r
ess
"
O
K
"
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e contextua
l
m
e
n
u
t
he
n
selec
t
"
H
an
g
up
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
9
.
34
07 USING THE TELEPHONE
RECEIVING A CALL
A
n incomin
g
call is announced b
y
a rin
g
and a superimposed displa
y
o
n th
e
sc
r
ee
n.
"Y
es
"
to accept the call is selected by
"
defau
lt.
Pr
ess
" O
K
" to accept the call.
S
elect " N
o
" and confi rm to re
j
ect the
ca
ll.
A
short press on
T
E
L
accep
t
s an
i
ncomin
g
call.
A
lon
g
press on
T
EL re
j
ects an incomin
g
ca
ll.
9
.
35
07
OPTIONS DURING A CALL *
Durin
g
a call, press the
M
OD
E
bu
tt
o
n
several times to select displa
y
of the
te
l
ep
h
one screen, t
h
en press
"
OK
"
t
o
open t
h
e contextua
l
menu.
Se
l
ec
t "
P
rivate mod
e
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm t
o
t
a
k
e
th
e
ca
ll
o
n th
e
h
a
n
dse
t.
O
r select "
H
ands-free mod
e
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm t
o
t
a
k
e
th
e
ca
ll vi
a
th
e
v
e
hi
c
l
e
'
s
speakers.
Se
l
ec
t "
P
ut call on hold"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm t
o
p
ut the current call on hold.
O
r select "
R
esume the call"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm t
o
r
esu
m
e
th
e
ca
ll
o
n h
o
l
d
.
Se
l
ec
t "
D
TMF rin
g
tones " t
o
use
th
e
numerical ke
y
pad, so as to navi
g
ate
throu
g
h the menu of an interactive vocal
ser
v
er
.
S
elect "
H
an
g
u
p
"
t
o
e
n
d
t
he
call
.
*
Dependin
g
on the compatibilit
y
o
f
the phone and
y
our service plan.
it is possible to hold a 3-wa
y
conference
c
all b
y
makin
g
2 calls in succession*.
S
elect "Conferenc
e
m
ode call" in th
e
c
ontextua
l
menu access
ibl
e us
i
n
g
t
hi
s
bu
tt
o
n.
O
r make a short press on this button.
9
.
36
07
Pr
ess
P
HON
E
twi
ce
.
Se
l
ec
t "
L
ist of the
p
aired
p
eri
p
herals"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
It is
p
ossible to:
-"Connec
t
"
o
r "
D
isconnec
t
" th
e
s
elected telephone,
- delete the pairin
g
o
f
the selected
te
l
ep
h
one.
It is also possible to select all pairings.
USING THE TELEPHONE
MANAGING PAIRED TELEPHONES CHANGING THE RING TONE
Pr
ess
P
HON
E
twi
ce
.
Se
l
ec
t "
P
hone functions "
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect "
R
in
g
options"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
You can ad
j
ust the volume and the t
y
pe
o
f
rin
g
tone.
S
elect "
B
luetooth functions
".
S
elect " OK "
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm t
o
sa
v
e
th
e
ch
an
g
es.
9
.
37
9
.
38
08
RADIO
Access to the "RADIO" menu
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
FM
/
AM
band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM band
FM / AM b d
FM / AM b d
FM / AM b d
FM / AM b d
FM / AM b d
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
Pr
ess
o
r
or use the rotar
y
control to select the
p
revious or next station in the list.
G
o
f
rom the list to the menu
(
le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht
)
.
or
P
r
ess
RADIO
.
9
.
39
08 RADIO
B
y
alphabetical list
Pr
ess
RADIO, select the station o
f
y
our
c
h
o
i
ce
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
B
y
automatic frequenc
y
search
Pr
ess
or
fo
r th
e
au
t
o
m
a
ti
c
sea
r
c
h
f
or a lower or hi
g
her radio
f
requenc
y
.
O
r turn the thumb wheel at the steerin
g
mou
nt
ed
co
ntr
o
l
s
.
B
y
manual frequenc
y
search
Pr
ess
or
to ad
j
ust the radio
frequenc
y
step b
y
step.
SELECTING A STATION
The external environment
(
hill, buildin
g
, tunnel, under
g
round car park...
)
ma
y
interfere with the reception, includin
g
in RDS station trackin
g
mode.
T
his phenomenon is a normal result of the wa
y
in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in an
y
wa
y
indicate a fault with the audio
sy
stem.
The qualit
y
of reception is represented b
y
the number o
f
active waves in this s
y
mbol.
Pr
ess
RADIO
or
OK to displa
y
the
co
nt
e
xt
ua
l m
e
n
u
.
CHANGING WAVEBAND
S
elect "Chan
g
e waveband
"
.
S
elect "AM
/
F
M
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
9
.4
0
08
Press the button on the numerical keypad to recall a
preset station.
O
r press then turn the thumb wheel at the steerin
g
m
ou
nt
ed
co
ntr
o
l
s
.
PRESETTING A STATION
Af
ter selectin
g
a station, press one o
f
the buttons
o
n the numerical ke
y
pad for 2 seconds to preset the
cu
rr
e
nt
s
t
a
ti
o
n.
An audible si
g
nal confi rms that the station has been preset.
Pr
ess
R
ADI
O
.
ACTIVATE / DEACTIVATE RDS
RD
S
, i
f
activated, allows
y
ou to continue listenin
g
to the same
s
tation b
y
automatic retunin
g
to alternative
f
requencies. However,
in certain conditions, covera
g
e of an RDS station ma
y
not be
assured throu
g
hout the entire countr
y
as radio stations do not
c
over 100 % of the territor
y
. This explains the loss of reception o
f
t
h
e stat
i
on
d
ur
i
n
g
a
j
ourne
y
.
Se
l
ec
t " Guidance o
p
tion
s
" th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
Ac
t
i
v
a
t
e
o
r
deac
t
i
v
a
t
e
"
RD
S
"
t
he
n
co
n
fi
rm.
RADIO
9
.4
1
9
.4
2
09
Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
MEDIA
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
G
o
f
rom the list to the menu
(
le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht
)
.
o
r
P
r
ess
M
USI
C
.
9
.4
3
09 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3 CD / USB PLAYER
The audio equipment will onl
y
pla
y
audio
fi
les with ".wma, .aac, .
fl
ac,
.
o
gg
and .mp3"
fi
le extensions and with a bit rate o
f
between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kb
p
s.
It also supports VBR
(
Variable Bit Rate
)
mode.
No other t
y
pe of fi le
(
.mp4, .m3u...
)
can be pla
y
ed.
WMA
fi
les must be o
f
the standard wma 9 t
y
pe.
The samplin
g
rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without usin
g
o
f
s
pecial characters
(
e.
g
.: " " ? ; ù
)
to avoid an
y
pla
y
in
g
and displa
y
in
g
p
ro
bl
ems.
In order to be able to pla
y
a recorded
C
DR or
C
DRW, when recordin
g
it is pre
f
erable to select the I
SO
9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it ma
y
not be pla
y
ed correctl
y
.
It is recommended that the same recordin
g
standard is alwa
y
s used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(
4x maximum
)
f
or optimum sound qualit
y
.
In the particular case o
f
a multi-session
C
D, the Joliet standard is
reco
mm
e
n
ded
.
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
The s
y
stem supports U
S
B mass stora
g
e or iPod
devices via the U
S
B port
(
suitable cable not supplied
)
.
I
f
a partitioned U
S
B memory key is connected to the
sy
stem, onl
y
the
fi
rst partition is reco
g
nised.
C
ontrol o
f
the peripheral device is with the audio
sy
stem controls.
The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,
9
99 tracks per folder.
I
f
the current consumption at the U
S
B port exceeds
5
00 mA, the s
y
stem
g
oes into protection mode and
deactivates the port.
O
ther peripherals, not reco
g
nised on connection, must
be connected to the auxiliar
y
socket usin
g
a Jack cable
(
not supplied
)
.
In order to be read, a U
S
B memory stick must be
f
ormatted
F
AT
16
o
r
32
.
The s
y
stem does not support the operation o
f
an Appl
e
®
pla
y
er and a
U
SB memor
y
stick connected at the same time.
It is recommended that o
ffi
cial Apple
®
USB cables are used to ensure
®
c
orrect operat
i
on.
9
.4
4
09 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Insert the
C
D in the player, insert the U
S
B
m
emor
y
stick in the U
S
B pla
y
er or connect the
US
B peripheral to the U
S
B port usin
g
a suitable
c
able
(
not supplied
)
The s
y
stem builds pla
y
lists
(
in temporar
y
m
emor
y)
, an operation which can take from
a
f
e
w
seco
n
ds
t
o
se
v
e
r
a
l min
u
t
es
a
t th
e
fi r
s
t
co
nn
ec
t
io
n.
R
educe
th
e
n
u
m
be
r
of
n
o
n-m
us
i
c
fi
l
es
a
n
d
th
e
n
umber o
f
f
olders to reduce the waitin
g
time.
The pla
y
lists are updated ever
y
time the i
g
nition
is switched off or connection of a USB memor
y
s
tick. However, the s
y
stem memorises these
lists and if the
y
are not modifi ed, the loadin
g
t
i
m
e
w
ill
be
sho
rt
e
r.
Pla
y
starts automaticall
y
a
f
ter a period which
depends on the capacit
y
o
f
the U
S
B memor
y
s
ti
c
k.
SELECTION OF SOURCE
Th
e
SOURC
E
button on the steerin
g
mounted controls allows a
direct chan
g
e to the next media source.
" CD / CD MP
3
"
"
U
SB, iPod"
"
AUX
"
"
STREAMIN
G
"
"
RADIO
"
P
r
ess
M
USI
C
to
di
sp
l
a
y
t
h
e
"
MEDIA
"
menu
.
S
elect "
F
o
ll
ow
i
n
g
me
di
a sourc
e
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
Repeat the operation as man
y
times as necessar
y
to obtain the
desired media source
(
except for radio which is accessible either
w
ith
SOURCE
or
RADIO
)
.
SOURCES
9
.4
5
09
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
+
/
/
/
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
SELECTING A TRACK
P
r
e
v
ious
tr
ack
.
Ne
xt tr
ack
.
Pr
e
vi
ous
fo
l
de
r.
N
e
xt f
o
l
de
r.
F
as
t f
o
rw
a
r
d
.
F
as
t
bac
kw
a
r
d
.
Pause: lon
g
press on SR
C
.
MUSIC: List of USB or CD tracks o
r
f
olders
U
p or
d
own
i
n t
h
e
li
st.
C
on
fi
rm, next menu level.
U
p one menu
l
eve
l
.
L
on
g
press
Lon
g
press
9
.4
6
09
A
UDIO STREAMING
S
treaming allows audio
fi
les on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
C
onnect the telephone: see "U
S
IN
G
THE TELEPH
O
NE".
S
elect "
A
udio"
o
r "
A
ll" pro
fi
le.
I
f
play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
a
udio pla
y
back
f
rom the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or b
y
usin
g
the audio s
y
stem
bu
tt
o
n
s
.
O
nce connected in streamin
g
mode, the telephone is considered to be
a
m
edia
sou
r
ce
.
It is recommended that you activate "
R
e
p
ea
t
"
o
n th
e
Bl
ue
t
oo
th
peripheral.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CONNECTING APPLE
®
PLAYERS
®
C
onnect the A
pp
le
®
pla
y
er to the U
S
B port usin
g
a suitable cable
(
not
supplied
)
.
Pla
y
starts automaticall
y
.
C
ontrol is via the audio system.
The classifi cations available are those of the portable device
c
onnected
(
artists / albums /
g
enres / pla
y
lists / audiobooks /
p
odcasts
)
.
The de
f
ault classi
fi
cation used is b
y
artist. To modi
fy
the classi
fi
cation
u
sed, return to the
fi
rst level o
f
the menu then select the desired
c
lassi
fi
cation
(
pla
y
lists
f
or example
)
and con
fi
rm to
g
o down throu
g
h
th
e
m
e
n
u
t
o
th
e
des
ir
ed
tr
ac
k.
The "
S
huffl e tracks" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random"
®
mode on the audio s
y
stem.
The "
S
huffl e albums" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random
®
a
ll"
on t
h
e au
di
o s
y
stem.
"
S
hu
ffl
e tracks" is restored b
y
de
f
ault on each connection.
The version of software in the audio s
y
stem ma
y
not be compatible
with the
g
eneration of
y
our Apple
®
pla
y
er.
The list of devices compatible with software versions is available from
PE
UG
E
O
T dealers.
9
.4
7
09 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
U
SING THE AUXILIARY INPUT
(
AUX
)
J
ACK AUDIO/USB CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
C
onnect the portable device
(
MP3, WMA pla
y
er…
)
to the JA
C
K
auxiliary audio socket or U
S
B port using a suitable cable.
Pr
ess
M
USI
C
to displa
y
the "MUSIC "
m
e
n
u
.
S
elect "Activate / Deactivate AUX
i
n
p
u
t
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
First adjust the volume o
f
your portable
device
(
to a hi
g
h level
)
. Then ad
j
ust the
volume o
f
y
our audio s
y
stem.
Displa
y
and mana
g
ement o
f
the controls are via the portable device.
9
.4
8
10 CONFIGURATION
Pr
ess
SETU
P
to displa
y
the
"
Confi
g
uration
"
m
e
n
u
.
S
elect "
Choose colour
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm t
o
r
se
l
ect t
h
e screen co
l
our
h
armon
y
an
d
t
h
e map presentat
i
on mo
d
e:
-
d
a
y
mo
d
e,
- night mode,
- automatic da
y/
ni
g
ht mode,
a
ccordin
g
to whether the
headlam
p
s are on.
S
elect "
Adj
ust
l
um
i
nos
i
t
y
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm
to a
dj
ust t
h
e screen
b
r
igh
tness.
Pr
ess
" O
K
" to save the chan
g
es.
The settin
g
s
f
or da
y
and ni
g
ht are
i
ndependent.
S
elect "
D
ispla
y
confi
g
uratio
n
"
a
n
d
co
nfi rm.
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
9
.4
9
10 CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
Select the settin
g
to ad
j
ust.
Confi rm b
y
pressin
g
O
K, then ad
j
ust
the settin
g
and confi rm a
g
ain to save
th
e
m
od
ifi
ca
ti
o
n.
Pr
ess
SETUP to displa
y
the
"
Confi
g
uration " m
e
n
u
.
A
d
j
ust the settin
g
s one b
y
one.
Th
e
n
se
l
ec
t " OK "
o
n th
e
sc
r
ee
n
a
n
d
c
onfi rm to save the settin
g
s.
Se
l
ec
t " S
y
nchronize the minutes with GP
S
" so that settin
g
the
minutes is done automaticall
y
b
y
satellite reception.
S
elect "
D
ispla
y
confi
g
uration
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
S
elect " Set date and tim
e
"
a
n
d
co
n
fi
rm.
9
.
50
9
.
51
11 TRIP COMPUTER
TRIP COMPUTER
Press the M
O
DE button several
times in succession until the tri
p
c
omputer is displa
y
ed.
Ran
g
e
:
displa
y
s the distance which can travelled with the
remainin
g
f
uel detected in the tank, basd on the avera
g
e
c
onsumption over the last few miles
(
kilometres
)
.
This displa
y
ed value ma
y
var
y
si
g
nifi cantl
y
followin
g
a chan
g
e in
the vehicle speed or the relief of the route.
When the ran
g
e
f
alls below 20 miles
(
30 km
)
, dashes are
displa
y
ed. A
f
ter
fi
llin
g
with at least 10 litres o
f
f
uel, the ran
g
e is
recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles
(
100 km
)
.
I
f
, whilst drivin
g
, dashes are displa
y
ed continuousl
y
in place o
f
the
di
g
its, contact a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer.
Each press o
f
the button at the end o
f
the wiper stalk displays the
di
ff
erent trip computer in
f
ormation in succession, accordin
g
to the
screen
.
A FEW DEFINITIONS
- Th
e
"v
e
hi
c
l
e
" t
ab
:
The ran
g
e, the current
f
uel
c
onsum
p
tion and the distance
r
emainin
g
.
- The "1"
(
trip 1
)
tab with:
Th
e avera
g
e spee
d
, t
h
e avera
g
e
f
uel consumption and the
dis
t
a
n
ce
tr
a
v
elled
calcula
t
ed
o
v
e
r r
ou
t
e
"
1
".
- The "2"
(
trip 2
)
tab with the same
f
u
n
c
ti
o
n
s
f
o
r
a
seco
n
d
r
ou
t
e
.
Current fuel consum
p
tion
:
on
ly
ca
l
cu
l
ate
d
an
d
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
a
b
ove
20 mph
(
30 km
/
h
)
.
Avera
g
e fuel consumption: this is the avera
g
e fuel consumption
s
ince the last trip computer zero reset.
D
istance travelled
:
calculated since the last tri
p
com
p
uter
ze
r
o
r
ese
t.
D
istance remainin
g
to the destination
:
ca
l
cu
l
a
t
ed
with r
efe
r
e
n
ce
to the
fi
nal destination, entered b
y
the user. I
f
g
uidance is activated,
the navi
g
ation s
y
stem calculates it as a current value.
A
vera
g
e spee
d
: t
hi
s
i
s t
h
e avera
g
e spee
d
ca
l
cu
l
ate
d
s
i
nce t
h
e
l
ast
trip computer zero reset
(
i
g
nition on
)
.
9
.
52
12 SCREEN MENU MAP
"N
av
ig
at
i
on -
g
u
id
ance
"
M
ENU
Enter an address
Select destination
Director
y
GP
S
coordinates
J
ourne
y
l
e
g
an
d
route
Add a sta
g
e
E
nter an address
D
irector
y
P
revious destinations
Order/delete
j
ourne
y
le
g
s
Di
vert route
Chosen destination
Guidance o
p
tions
Defi ne calculation criteria
Delete last destinations
Map mana
g
ement
Ma
p
orientation
M
AIN FUNCTION
option A
1
o
p
tion A2
OPTION A
OPTION B...
M
a
p
d
eta
il
s
M
ove t
h
e ma
p
M
app
i
n
g
an
d
up
d
at
i
n
g
Descri
p
tion of risk areas database
Stop / Restore
g
uidance
1
2
3
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Set parameters for risk areas
2
Fastest rout
e
2
Shortest rout
e
D
istance/Tim
e
Wi
t
h
to
ll
s
2
2
2
With Ferr
y
2
T
raffi c info
2
Set speech s
y
nthesis
Fastest rout
e
S
hortest rout
e
3
3
2
D
istance/Tim
e
With tolls
3
3
Wi
t
h
F
err
y
T
raffi c inf
o
3
3
3
3
3
North direction
V
ehicle direction
P
ers
p
ective vie
w
9
.
53
12 SCREEN MENU MAP
Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations
Displa
y
/
Do not displa
y
messages
"TRAFFIC" MENU
Geo
g
raphic filter
Retain all the messages
Retain the messages
Around the vehicl
e
On the rout
e
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
Dial
Director
y
of contacts
Call
O
p
en
I
m
p
ort
Phone MENU
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
List of the
p
aired
p
eri
p
herals
Connec
t
D
isconnec
t
D
elet
e
D
elete al
l
Contact mem. status
Phone functions
Ri
n
g
opt
i
ons
D
e
l
ete ca
ll
s
l
o
g
Bluetooth functions
Peri
p
herals search
Rename radiotele
p
hone
H
an
g
up
D
isplay all phone contacts
D
e
l
ete
Contacts mana
g
ement
New contact
Delete all contacts
Im
p
ort all the entries
S
y
nchronization options
D
ispla
y
telephone contacts
No s
y
nchronization
D
ispla
y
SIM card contacts
2
Cancel
2
Sort b
y
First name/Name
3
Cance
l
9
.
54
12 SCREEN MENU MAP
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
R
an
d
om on a
ll
me
di
a
R
e
p
et
i
t
i
on
A
udio settin
g
s
A
ctivate
/
Deactivate AUX
i
n
p
ut
"MUSIC" MENU
Chan
g
e Media
R
ea
d
mo
d
e
N
orma
l
R
an
d
om
All
passen
g
ers
Le-
Ri
b
a
l
ance
F
r-
R
e
b
a
l
ance
A
uto.
V
o
l
ume
U
p
date radio list
Bass
Treble
Loudness
Di
str
ib
ut
i
on
D
r
i
ve
r
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
E
q
ualize
r
"RADIO" MENU
Chan
g
e Waveband
Guidance o
p
tions
T
A
RDS
A
u
di
o sett
i
n
g
s
Non
e
Classical
Jaz
z
Roc
k
T
echn
o
V
ocal
2
2
2
2
USB/iPod
A
UX
C
D
BT Streamin
g
2
AM
/
FM
3
Activated / Deactivated
3
Activated / Deactivated
9
.
55
12 SCREEN MENU MAP
2
3
3
1
4
2
2
1
4
4
2
2
Ni
g
ht mode
A
uto Da
y
/Ni
g
ht
Ad
j
ust luminosit
y
Set date and time
"SETUP" MENU
Displa
y
confi
g
uration
Choose colou
r
Harmon
y
Carto
g
raph
y
Da
y
mode
Speech s
y
nthesis settin
g
Guidance instructions volume
Select male voice / Select female voice
2
Select units
2
3
3
2
Li
g
htin
g
confi
g
uration
Parkin
g
assistance
E
n
g
a
g
e rear wiper in REVERS
E
D
uration of
g
uide-me home li
g
htin
g
1
Define vehicle parameters *
2
O
p
eration of wi
p
ers
3
D
irectional headlam
p
s
3
M
oo
d
ligh
t
i
n
g
3
D
a
y
time runnin
g
lamp
s
*
The parameters var
y
accordin
g
to the vehicle.
2
Al
ert
l
o
g
1
T
r
ip
com
p
uter
2
Status of functions
2
Fran
ç
ais
1
Select lan
g
ua
g
e
2
En
g
lish
2
Italiano
2
Portu
g
uese
2
Es
p
añol
2
Deutsch
2
N
e
d
er
l
an
d
s
2
Turkish
2
Polski
2
Р
у
сски
й
9
.
56
The followin
g
table
g
roups to
g
ether the answers to the most frequentl
y
asked questions concernin
g
y
our audio s
y
stem.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
Th
e
r
ou
t
e
ca
l
cu
l
a
ti
o
n i
s
no
t
successfu
l.
The
g
uidance criteria ma
y
con
fl
ict with the current location
(
exclusion o
f
toll roads on a toll motorwa
y)
.
C
heck the
g
uidance criteria on the Navi
g
ation
M
enu, "
G
uidance o
p
tions"
\
"De
fi
ne calculation
c
rit
e
ri
a
".
The P
O
Is do not a
pp
ear. The P
O
Is have not been selected.
S
elect the P
O
Is in the list of P
O
Is.
Th
e
P
O
I
s
h
a
v
e
n
o
t
bee
n
do
wnl
oaded
. D
o
wnl
oad
th
e
P
O
I
s
f
r
o
m th
e
w
ebs
it
e
:
"
http://peu
g
eot.navi
g
ation.com".
Th
e
ri
s
k
a
r
eas
aud
i
b
l
e
warnin
g
does not work.
The audible warnin
g
is not active.
A
ctivate audible warnin
g
s in the Guidance options
m
enu, "Navi
g
ation -
g
uidance", "Set parameters
f
o
r ri
s
k
a
r
eas
".
The system does not
s
u
gg
est a detour around
a
n in
c
i
de
nt
o
n th
e
r
ou
t
e
.
The guidance criteria do not take account o
f
TM
C
messages.
S
elect the "Tra
ffi
c in
f
o"
f
unction in the list o
f
g
uidance criteria.
I r
ece
iv
e
a
Ri
s
k
a
r
ea
a
l
e
rt
w
hi
c
h
i
s not on m
y
route.
O
ther than
g
uidance, the s
y
stem announces all Risk areas positioned in a
c
one located in front of the vehicle. It ma
y
provide an alert for a Risk area
l
ocate
d
on near
by
or para
ll
e
l
roa
d
s.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Risk area. Select "
O
n the route" to no lon
g
er
r
ece
i
ve a
l
erts ot
h
er t
h
an
g
u
id
ance or to re
d
uce t
h
e
tim
e
fo
r th
e
a
nn
ou
n
ce
m
e
nt.
9
.
57
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
Certain traffi c
j
ams
a
l
on
g
t
h
e route are not
i
n
dica
t
ed
i
n r
eal
t
i
m
e
.
O
n startin
g
, it is several minutes before the s
y
stem be
g
ins to receive the
tr
affi
c
in
fo
rm
a
ti
o
n.
Wait until the traffi c information is bein
g
received
c
orrectl
y
(
displa
y
o
f
the tra
ffi
c in
f
ormation icons on
the map
)
.
Th
e
fi lt
e
r
s
a
r
e
t
oo
r
es
tri
c
tiv
e
. Modif
y
the "Geo
g
raphic fi lter" settin
g
s.
In certain countries, onl
y
ma
j
or routes
(
motorwa
y
s...
)
are listed for the
tr
a
ffi
c
inf
o
rm
a
ti
o
n.
This phenomenon is normal. The s
y
stem is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
Th
e
a
ltit
ude
i
s
n
o
t
displa
y
ed.
O
n startin
g
, the initialisation of the GPS ma
y
take up to 3 minutes to
r
eceive more than 4 satellites correctl
y
.
Wait until the s
y
stem has started up completel
y
.
Check that there is a GPS covera
g
e of at least
4 satellites
(
lon
g
press on the SETUP button, then
s
elect "GPS covera
g
e"
)
.
Dependin
g
on the
g
eo
g
raphical environment
(
tunnel...
)
or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS si
g
nal ma
y
var
y
.
This phenomenon is normal. The s
y
stem
is dependent on the GPS si
g
nal reception
co
n
di
t
io
n
s
.
I
cannot connect m
y
Bl
uetoot
h
te
l
ep
h
one.
The telephone's Bluetooth
f
unction ma
y
be switched o
ff
or the telephone
ma
y
not
b
e v
i
s
ibl
e.
-
C
heck that
y
our telephone's Bluetooth
fu
n
c
ti
o
n i
s
s
wit
c
h
ed
o
n.
-
C
heck in the telephone settings that it is
"
vi
s
i
b
l
e
t
o
a
ll".
Th
e
Bl
uetoot
h
te
l
ep
h
one
i
s not compat
ibl
e w
i
t
h
t
h
e s
y
stem.
A
list o
f
compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is
a
v
a
il
ab
l
e
f
r
o
m th
e
dea
l
e
r n
e
tw
o
rk.
Th
e
v
o
l
u
m
e
o
f th
e
tele
p
hone connected
in Bl
ue
t
oo
th m
ode
i
s
i
n
audible
.
The volume depends both on the s
y
stem and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio s
y
stem, to
m
aximum if re
q
uired, and increase the volume o
f
the telephone if necessar
y
.
The ambient noise level has an infl uence on the qualit
y
of telephone
co
mm
u
n
ica
t
io
n.
Reduce the ambient noise level
(
close the windows,
r
educe the booster
f
an speed, slow down, ...
)
.
9
.
58
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
So
m
e
co
nt
ac
t
s
a
r
e
du
p
licated in the list.
The options
f
or s
y
nchronizin
g
contacts are s
y
nchronizin
g
the contacts
on the SIM card, the contacts on the tele
p
hone, or both . When both
s
y
nchronizations are selected, some contacts ma
y
be duplicated.
S
elect "Displa
y
S
IM card contacts" or "Displa
y
tele
p
hone contacts".
C
ontacts are not shown
i
n a
l
p
h
a
b
et
i
ca
l
or
d
er.
Some telephones offer displa
y
options. Dependin
g
on the settin
g
s
c
hosen, contacts can be transferred in a specifi c order.
Modif
y
the displa
y
settin
g
in the telephone
di
rector
y
.
The s
y
stem does not
receive
S
M
S
text messa
g
es.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sendin
g
S
M
S
text messa
g
es to the
s
y
stem.
The
C
D is e
j
ected
automaticall
y
or is not
p
la
y
ed b
y
the pla
y
er.
The
C
D is inserted upside down, is unpla
y
able, does not contain an
y
a
udio data or contains an audio format which the pla
y
er cannot pla
y
.
-
C
heck that the
C
D is inserted in the pla
y
er the
ri
g
ht wa
y
up.
-
C
heck the condition of the
C
D: the
C
D cannot
be pla
y
ed if it is too dama
g
ed.
-
C
heck the content in the case o
f
a recorded
C
D: re
f
er to the advice in the "AUDI
O
" section.
- The audio system's
C
D player does not play
DVD
s
.
-
S
ome recorded
C
Ds will not be pla
y
ed b
y
the audio s
y
stem because the
y
are not of the
c
orrect qualit
y
.
Le
C
D has been recorded in a
f
ormat that is not compatible with the player.
The CD is protected b
y
an anti-piratin
g
protection s
y
stem which is not
r
eco
g
nised b
y
the audio s
y
stem.
There is a lon
g
waitin
g
p
eriod
f
ollowin
g
the insertion
of a
C
D or connection of a
U
SB memor
y
stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the s
y
stem reads a certain amount o
f
data
(
director
y
, title, artist, etc.
)
. This ma
y
take
f
rom a
f
ew seconds to a
f
e
w min
u
t
es
.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD pla
y
er sound is
poor
.
The CD used is scratched or of poor qualit
y
. Insert
g
ood qualit
y
CDs and store them in suitable
co
n
di
t
io
n
s
.
The audio equipment settin
g
s
(
bass, treble, ambiences
)
are unsuitable.
S
et the treble or bass level to 0, without selectin
g
a
n
a
m
b
i
e
n
ce
.
9
.
59
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
Some characters in the
med
i
a
in
fo
rm
a
ti
o
n
a
r
e
n
o
t
displayed correctly while
p
la
y
in
g
.
The audio s
y
stem does not displa
y
some t
y
pes of characters.
U
se stan
d
ar
d
c
h
aracters to name trac
k
s an
d
fo
l
de
r
s
.
Pla
y
in
g
of streamin
g
fi les
does
n
o
t
s
t
a
rt.
Th
e per
i
p
h
era
l
d
ev
i
ce connecte
d
d
oes not support automat
i
c p
l
a
y
. Start the pla
y
back from the device.
Th
e
n
a
m
es
o
f tr
ac
k
s
a
n
d
t
h
e trac
k
l
en
g
t
h
are not
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
on t
h
e screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profi le does not allow the transfer of this information.
The qualit
y
o
f
reception
o
f th
e
r
ad
i
o
s
t
a
ti
o
n
listened to
g
raduall
y
de
t
e
r
io
r
a
t
es
o
r t
he
s
t
o
r
ed
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
do
n
o
t
fu
n
c
ti
o
n
(
no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...
)
.
The vehicle is too
f
ar
f
rom the transmitter used b
y
the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the
g
eo
g
raphical area throu
g
h which the
vehicle is travellin
g
.
A
ctivate the "RD
S
"
f
unction b
y
means o
f
the
s
hort-cut menu to enable the s
y
stem to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
g
eo
g
rap
hi
ca
l
area.
The environment
(
hills, buildin
g
s, tunnels, basement car parks...
)
block
r
eception, includin
g
in RDS mode.
This
p
henomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio s
y
stem.
The aerial is absent or has been dama
g
ed
(f
or example when
g
oin
g
throu
g
h a car wash or into an under
g
round car park
)
.
Have the aerial checked b
y
a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer.
I
ca
nn
o
t
fi
n
d
so
m
e
r
ad
i
o
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
in th
e
li
s
t
of
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
r
ece
iv
ed
.
Th
e stat
i
on
i
s not rece
i
ve
d
or
i
ts name
h
as c
h
an
g
e
d
i
n t
h
e
li
st.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(
the
title of the son
g
for example
)
.
The s
y
stem interprets this in
f
ormation as the name o
f
the station.
Th
e
n
a
m
e
of
th
e
r
ad
i
o
s
tation chan
g
es.
9
.
60
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
I
n c
h
an
gi
n
g
t
h
e sett
i
n
g
of
tr
eb
l
e
a
n
d
bass
th
e
e
qua
li
zer sett
i
n
g
i
s
dese
l
ec
t
ed
.
The selection of an equalizer settin
g
imposes the balance settin
g
s.
Modi
fy
in
g
one without the other is not possible.
Modif
y
the balance or equalizer settin
g
s to obtain
t
he
desi
r
ed
m
usical
a
m
bie
n
ce
.
In chan
g
in
g
the equalizer
s
ettin
g
, treble and bass
re
t
u
rn t
o
z
e
r
o
.
Wh
en c
h
an
gi
n
g
t
h
e
b
a
l
ance sett
i
n
g
s, t
h
e
distribution setting is
dese
l
ec
t
ed
.
The selection o
f
a distribution settin
g
imposes the balance settin
g
s.
Modi
f
ying one without the other is not possible.
Modi
fy
the balance or distribution settin
g
s to
ob
t
ai
n t
he
desi
r
ed
m
usical
a
m
bie
n
ce
.
When chan
g
in
g
an
distribution settin
g
,
t
h
e
b
a
l
ance sett
i
n
g
i
s
deselec
t
ed
.
Th
e
r
e
i
s
a
d
i
ffe
r
e
n
ce
in
s
oun
d
qua
li
t
y
b
etween
th
e
d
i
ffe
r
e
nt
aud
i
o
s
ources
(
radio,
C
D...
)
.
For optimum sound qualit
y
, the audio settin
g
s
f
or Volume, Bass, Treble,
Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the di
ff
erent sound sources,
which may result in audible di
ff
erences when changing source
(
radio,
C
D...
)
.
C
heck that the audio settin
g
s
f
or
(
Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness
)
are adapted to
th
e
sou
r
ces
li
s
t
e
n
ed
t
o
. It i
s
ad
vi
sab
l
e
t
o
se
t th
e
A
UDI
O
f
unctions
(
Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance
)
to the middle position, select the
"
None", musical ambience and set the loudness
c
orrection to the "Active"
p
osition in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
9
.
61
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
With the en
g
ine off, the
sy
stem switches off after
a
fe
w min
u
t
es
of
use
.
When the en
g
ine is switched off, the s
y
stem's operatin
g
time depends on
t
h
e
b
atter
y
c
h
ar
g
e.
The switch-o
ff
is normal: the s
y
stem switches to econom
y
mode and
switches o
ff
to prevent dischar
g
in
g
o
f
the vehicle's batter
y
.
Start the vehicle's en
g
ine to increase the batter
y
ch
ar
g
e.
Pla
y
back of m
y
USB
m
emor
y
stick starts onl
y
after a ver
y
lon
g
wait
(
around 2 to 3 minutes
)
.
Some fi les supplied with the memor
y
stick ma
y
g
reatl
y
slow down access
to readin
g
the memor
y
stick
(
multiplication b
y
10 of the catalo
g
ue time
)
.
Delete the fi les supplied with the memor
y
stick
a
n
d
limit th
e
n
u
m
be
r
o
f
sub
-f
o
l
de
r
s
in th
e
fi l
e
s
tructure on the memor
y
stick.
Wh
en
I
connect m
y
iPhone as telephone and
to the U
S
B port at the
s
ame time, I am unable
to pla
y
the music fi les.
When the iPhone connects automaticall
y
as a telephone, it
f
orces the
streaming
f
unction. The streaming
f
unction takes the place o
f
the U
S
B
f
unction which is then not useable, there is a period without sound o
f
the
track bein
g
pla
y
ed with Apple
®
players.
®
Disconnect and reconnect to the U
S
B port
(
the
US
B
f
unction takes priority over streaming
)
.
9
.
62
9
.
63
Peu
g
eot Connect Sound
Your Peu
g
eot
C
onnect
S
ound is coded in such a wa
y
that it will only operate in your vehicle.
For safet
y
reasons, the driver must carr
y
out operations
which require prolon
g
ed attention while the vehicle is
s
tationar
y
.
When the en
g
ine is switched off and to prevent
dischar
g
in
g
o
f
the batter
y
, the audio equipment ma
y
s
wit
c
h
off
af
t
e
r
a
fe
w min
u
t
es
.
A
UDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH
01 First ste
p
s
02 Steerin
g
mounted controls
03 Main menu
04 Audio
05 Peu
g
eot Connect USB
06 Bluetooth
07 Confi
g
uration
08 Tri
p
com
p
uter
CONTENTS
09 Screen menu ma
p
Frequentl
y
asked questions
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
p
.
9.
6
4
9.
6
5
9.
6
6
9.
6
7
9.7
0
9.7
3
9.7
6
9.7
7
9.7
8
9.8
3
9
.
64
01
FIRST STEPS
E
j
ect
C
D.
S
elect source:
r
adio, audio
C
D
/
MP3
C
D, U
S
B,
J
ack connection,
S
treaming,
AU
X.
S
elect the screen display
mode
:
D
ate, audio
f
unctions, trip
c
om
p
uter, tele
p
hone.
A
utomatic
f
requenc
y
search
down
/
up.
S
elect
p
revious/next CD, MP3
or
US
B track.
A
udio settin
g
s: front/
r
ear
f
ader, le
f
t
/
ri
g
ht
balance, bass
/
treble,
l
oudness, audio
a
m
b
i
e
n
ces
.
Displa
y
the list o
f
local
s
t
a
t
io
n
s
.
Lon
g
press:
C
D
tracks or MP
3
f
olders
(C
D
/
U
S
B
)
.
TA
(
Traffi c Announcements
)
on
/
off.
Lon
g
press: PTY *
(
radio
Pro
g
ramme TYpe
)
mode.
Display main menu.The DARK button changes the screen display
f
or improved drivin
g
com
f
ort at ni
g
ht.
1
st
press: upper bar onl
y
illuminated.
2
n
d
p
ress: black screen.
3
rd
press: return to standard displa
y
.
O
n/off, volume settin
g
.
Buttons 1 to 6:
S
elect a pre-set radio station.
Lon
g
press: pre-set a station.
S
elect next
f
requency down
/
up.
S
elect previous
/
next MP3
f
older.
S
elect previous
/
next
f
older
/
g
enre
/
artist / pla
y
list
(
USB
)
.
C
on
fi
rm.
S
elect wavebands
F
M1, FM2, FMast and
A
M.
A
ba
n
do
n th
e
cu
rr
e
nt
operation.
*
Available according to version.
9
.
65
02
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
R
adio: select the previous/next pre-set
s
t
a
t
io
n.
U
S
B: select
g
enre
/
artist
/
f
older
f
rom the
c
l
ass
i
fi
ca
ti
o
n li
s
t.
S
elect the previous
/
next item in a menu.
Chan
g
e audio source.
C
onfi rm a selection.
Call/end call on the telephone.
Pr
ess
fo
r m
o
r
e
th
a
n 2
seco
n
ds
:
telephone main menu.
R
ad
i
o
:
au
t
o
m
a
ti
c
sea
r
c
h f
o
r
a
l
o
w
er
frequenc
y
.
C
D
/
MP
3
/
US
B: selection of the
p
rev
i
ous trac
k
.
C
D
/
U
S
B: continuous press:
f
ast
re
v
erse
.
M
o
v
e
in th
e
li
s
t.
Radio: automatic search for a hi
g
her
frequenc
y
.
C
D
/
MP
3
/
US
B: selection of the next
tr
ack
.
C
D
/
U
S
B: continuous press:
f
ast
f
orwards pla
y
.
M
o
v
e
in th
e
li
s
t.
V
o
l
u
m
e
in
c
r
ease
.
V
o
l
u
m
e
dec
r
ease
.
M
ute: press t
h
e vo
l
ume
i
n
c
r
ease
a
n
d
dec
r
ease
b
uttons s
i
mu
l
taneous
ly
.
The sound is restored by
p
ressin
g
one o
f
the two
v
o
l
u
m
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
.
9
.
66
03
AUDIO FUNCTION
S
:
r
adio,
C
D, U
S
B, options.
> MONOCHROME SCREEN C
For a detailed
g
lobal view o
f
the menus available, re
f
er to
the "
S
creen menu map" in this
sec
ti
o
n.
T
ELEPHON
E
:
Bluetooth hands-
f
ree,
pairin
g
, mana
g
ement
of
a
ca
ll.
P
ERSONALISATION-
CONFIGURATIO
N
:
vehicle
p
arameters,
displa
y
, lan
g
ua
g
es.
T
RIP COMPUTER : enterin
g
o
f distances, alerts, status of
f
u
n
c
ti
o
n
s
.
> MONOCHROME
S
CREEN
A
9
.
67
04 AUDIO
Press the
SOU
R
C
E button several
tim
es
in
success
i
o
n
a
n
d
se
l
ec
t th
e
rad
i
o
.
Press the BAND A
S
T button to select
a waveband: FM1
,
FM2
,
FMast
,
AM.
Briefl
y
press one of the buttons to
c
arr
y
out an automatic search o
f
the
radio
s
t
a
t
io
n
s
.
Press one o
f
the buttons to carry out
a manual search up
/
down
f
or radio
f
requencies.
Press the LI
S
T REFRE
S
H button to
displa
y
the list of stations received
locall
y
(
30 stations maximum
)
.
To update this list, press for more
t
ha
n tw
o
seco
n
ds
.
The external environment
(
hills, buildin
g
s, tunnels, basement car parks, ...
)
m
a
y
block reception, includin
g
in RD
S
mode. This is a normal e
ff
ect o
f
the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any
f
ailure
of
the audio s
y
stem.
RDS
R
ADIO
SELECTING A STATION
Press the MENU button.
S
elect A
U
DI
O
F
U
N
C
TI
O
N
S
then
p
ress
O
K.
S
elect the FM WAVEBAND
P
REFERENCES function then press
O
K.
S
elect A
C
TIVATE RD
S
then press
O
K. RD
S
appears on the screen.
In radio mode, press
O
K directl
y
to activate / deactivate RDS
mode
.
The RDS, if displa
y
ed, enables
y
ou to continue listenin
g
to the same
s
tation b
y
automatic retunin
g
to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
c
onditions, covera
g
e of an RDS station ma
y
not be assured throu
g
hout the
c
ountr
y
as radio stations do not cover 100
%
o
f
the territor
y
. Under conditions
of
ver
y
weak reception, the s
y
stem ma
y
chan
g
e to a re
g
ional station.
9
.
68
04
Insert circular compact discs only.
S
ome anti-piratin
g
s
y
stems, on ori
g
inal discs or
C
Ds copied usin
g
a
personal recorder, ma
y
cause faults which are no refl ection on the
q
ualit
y
of the ori
g
inal pla
y
er.
Without pressin
g
the EJECT button, insert a CD in the pla
y
er, pla
y
b
e
gi
ns automat
i
ca
lly
.
C
D
PLAYING A CD
To pla
y
a disc which has alread
y
been
inserted,
p
ress the S
O
URCE button
se
v
e
r
a
l tim
es
in
success
i
o
n
a
n
d
s
elect
C
D.
Pr
ess
o
n
e
of
th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
t
o
se
l
ec
t
a
track on the
C
D.
Press the LI
S
T REFRE
S
H button to display the list o
f
tracks on the
C
D.
Pr
ess
a
n
d
h
o
l
d
o
n
e
o
f th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
f
o
r
f
as
t f
o
rw
a
r
ds
o
r f
as
t
bac
kw
a
r
ds
.
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
Pr
ess
th
e
TA
bu
tt
o
n t
o
ac
tiv
a
t
e
o
r
deactivate traffi c messa
g
es.
The TA
(
Traffi c Announcement
)
function
g
ives priorit
y
to TA alert
m
essa
g
es. To operate, this
f
unction needs
g
ood reception o
f
a
radio station transmittin
g
this t
y
pe o
f
messa
g
e. When a tra
ffi
c
report is transmitted, the current audio source
(
Radio,
C
D, ...
)
is
interrupted automaticall
y
to pla
y
the TA messa
g
e. Normal pla
y
back
of
th
e
aud
i
o
sou
r
ce
r
esu
m
es
a
t th
e
e
n
d
of
th
e
tr
a
n
s
mi
ss
i
o
n
of
th
e
m
essa
g
e.
9
.
69
04
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio La
y
er 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recordin
g
o
f
s
everal tens o
f
music
fi
les on a sin
g
le disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded
C
DR or
C
DRW, when
r
ecordin
g
, the I
SO
9660 level 1.2 or Joliet
fi
le
f
ormat is
reco
mm
e
n
ded
.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it ma
y
not be pla
y
ed
c
orrectl
y
.
It is recommended that the same recordin
g
format is alwa
y
s
u
sed
f
or an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible
(
4x maximum
)
f
or optimum sound qualit
y
.
In the particular case o
f
a multi-session
C
D, the Joliet
f
ormat is
reco
mm
e
n
ded
.
The audio s
y
stem will onl
y
pla
y
fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
a samplin
g
rate o
f
22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other t
y
pe o
f
fi
le
(
.wma, .mp4, .m3u...
)
can be pla
y
ed.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without usin
g
s
pecial characters
(
e.
g
. " ? ; ù
)
to avoid an
y
pla
y
in
g
or displa
y
in
g
p
roblems.
M
P3 CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
AUDIO
Empt
y
CDs are not reco
g
nised and ma
y
dama
g
e the s
y
stem.
Insert an MP3 compilation in the pla
y
er.
The audio equipment searches
f
or all o
f
the music tracks, which
ma
y
take an
y
thin
g
between a
f
ew seconds and several tens o
f
s
econds, be
f
ore pla
y
be
g
ins.
MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION
O
n a sin
g
le disc, the
C
D pla
y
er can read up to 255 MP3
fi
les
sp
read over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to kee
p
to
a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the
C
D is
p
la
y
ed.
While the CD is bein
g
pla
y
ed, the folder structure is not followed.
A
ll o
f
the
fi
les are displa
y
ed on a sin
g
le level.
T
o p
l
a
y
a
di
sc w
hi
c
h
h
as a
l
rea
dy
been inserted, press the
SO
UR
C
E
bu
tt
o
n
se
v
e
r
a
l tim
es
in
success
i
o
n
a
n
d
se
l
ec
t
C
D.
Pr
ess
o
n
e
of
th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
t
o
se
l
ec
t
a
fo
l
de
r
o
n th
e
C
D.
Press the LI
S
T REFRE
S
H button to displa
y
the list o
f
directories o
f
the MP3 com
p
ilation.
Pr
ess
a
n
d
h
o
l
d
o
n
e
of
th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
fo
r
f
ast
f
orward or backward pla
y
.
Pr
ess
o
n
e
o
f th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
t
o
se
l
ec
t
a
track on the
C
D.
9
.7
0
05
The s
y
stem puts to
g
ether pla
y
lists
(
temporar
y
memor
y)
created
o
ver a period which depends on the capacity o
f
the U
S
B device.
The other sources are available durin
g
this time.
The pla
y
lists are updated each time the i
g
nition is switched off or
e
ach time a USB memor
y
stick is connected.
When connectin
g
for the fi rst time, the classifi cation su
gg
ested
is b
y
folder. When
y
ou reconnect, the classifi cation selected
prev
i
ous
ly
i
s reta
i
ne
d
.
C
onnect the memor
y
stick to the port, directl
y
or
u
sin
g
a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Pla
y
be
g
ins automaticall
y
after a
dela
y
which depends on the capacit
y
of the USB
m
emor
y
st
i
c
k
.
The
fi
le
f
ormats supported are .mp3
(
mpe
g
1
l
ayer 3 only
)
and .wma
(
standard 9 only,
128 kbits
/
sec compression
)
.
C
ertain pla
y
list
f
ormats are supported
(
.m3u, ...
)
O
n reconnection of the previous memor
y
stick
u
sed, pla
y
is resumed automaticall
y
with the last
trac
k
p
l
a
y
e
d
.
This unit consists o
f
a U
S
B port and an auxiliar
y
J
ack socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted
from a portable device - di
g
ital pla
y
er or a USB
m
emor
y
stick - to
y
our Peu
g
eot Connect Sound
(
RD5
)
and heard via the vehicle's speakers.
USB memor
y
stick
(
1.1, 1.2 and 2.0
)
or Apple
®
p
la
y
er o
f
g
eneration 5 or later:
- U
S
B memory sticks should be
f
ormatted
F
AT or FAT 32
(
NTF
S
not supported
)
,
- the Apple
®
pla
y
er lead is essential,
- navi
g
ation throu
g
h the fi le database is also
possible b
y
means of the steerin
g
mounted
co
ntr
o
l
s
.
The list o
f
compatible equipment and the compression rates supported
a
r
e
a
v
a
il
ab
l
e
f
r
o
m PE
UG
E
O
T
dea
l
e
r
s
.
U
SING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK
O
ther Apple
®
players of earlier generations and
®
p
la
y
ers usin
g
the MTP protocol * :
- pla
y
via Jack-Jack lead onl
y
(
not supplied
)
,
- navi
g
ation throu
g
h the fi le database is from
t
h
e porta
bl
e
d
ev
i
ce.
* Accordin
g
to vehicle.
9
.7
1
05
USING THE PEUGEOT CONNECT USB
Press LIST briefl
y
to displa
y
the
p
reviousl
y
selected classifi cation.
Navi
g
ate throu
g
h the list usin
g
the left/
r
i
g
ht and up
/
down buttons.
C
on
fi
rm the selection b
y
pressin
g
O
K.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Pla
y
list
(
as defi ned in the
Apple
®
pla
y
er
)
.
S
election and Navi
g
ation are described in steps 1 to 4 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or
US
B connection device other
than audio equipment to the USB port. This could dama
g
e
y
ou
r
in
s
t
a
ll
a
ti
o
n.
CONNECTING AN APPLE
®
PLAYER VIA THE USB PORT
®
Press one of these buttons to
g
ain
access to the
p
revious / next track on
the classifi cation list currentl
y
bein
g
pl
a
y
e
d
.
Pr
ess
a
n
d
h
o
l
d
o
n
e
of
th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
fo
r
f
ast
f
orward or backward pla
y
.
Pr
ess
o
n
e
o
f th
ese
bu
tt
o
n
s
t
o
g
ain access to the previous / next
Genre, Folder, Artist or Pla
y
list on
the classi
fi
cation list currentl
y
bein
g
pl
a
y
e
d
.
Press and hold LI
S
T to displa
y
the
d
i
ffe
r
e
nt
c
l
ass
i
fi
ca
ti
o
n
s
.
Select b
y
Folder / Artist / Genre / Pla
y
list,
p
ress
O
K to select the classifi cation
r
equired, then press
O
K a
g
ain to confi rm.
- b
y
Folder: all folders containin
g
audio
fi
les reco
g
nised on the peripheral
de
v
ice
.
- by Artist: all o
f
the artist names
de
fi
ned in the ID3 Ta
g
s, classi
fi
ed in
a
lphabetical order.
- b
y
Genre: all of the
g
enres defi ned in
the ID3 Ta
g
s.
- b
y
Pla
y
list: in accordance with the
pla
y
lists recorded on the USB device.
USB PLAYER
9
.7
2
05
The displa
y
and control is via the portable device.
First ad
j
ust the volume of
y
our portable device.
Then ad
j
ust the volume o
f
y
our audio
sy
stem.
U
SING THE AUXILIARY INPUT
(
AUX
)
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF THE
AUXILIARY SOURCE
JACK socket or USB port (according to vehicle)
USB PLAYER
Do not connect a device to both the
J
A
C
K socket and the
US
B
p
ort at the same time.
C
onnect the portable device
(
MP3
p
la
y
er…
)
to the JA
C
K socket or to the
U
SB port, usin
g
a suitable cable
(
not
s
upplied
)
.
Press the
SOU
R
C
E button several
times in succession and select A
U
X.
The auxiliar
y
input, JA
C
K or U
S
B, allows the connection o
f
a
p
ortable device
(
MP3 pla
y
er...
)
.
9
.7
3
06 BLUETOOTH
For safet
y
reasons and because the
y
require prolon
g
ed attention
o
n the part of the driver, the operations for pairin
g
of the Bluetooth
m
obile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free s
y
stem of
y
our
au
di
o equ
i
pment must
b
e carr
i
e
d
out w
i
t
h
t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e stat
i
onar
y
an
d
t
h
e
ig
n
i
t
i
on on.
Pr
ess
th
e
MEN
U
bu
tt
o
n.
A
w
i
n
d
ow
i
s
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
w
i
t
h
a messa
g
e t
h
at a searc
h
i
s
i
n pro
g
ress.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
f
unction
and ensure that it is "visible to all"
(
telephone
c
on
fi
g
uration.
In the menu, select:
- Bluetooth telephone
f
unction -
A
ud
i
o
- Bluetooth confi
g
uration
- P
e
rf
o
rm
a
Bl
ue
t
oo
th
sea
r
c
h
The services o
ff
ered depend on the network, the
S
IM card and the
c
ompatibility o
f
the Bluetooth equipment used.
C
onsult
y
our telephone's manual and
y
our operator to
fi
nd out which
services are available to
y
ou.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
S
CREEN C
The TELEPH
O
NE menu permits access to the followin
g
functions
in particular: Director
y
* , Call list, Pairin
g
mana
g
ement.
The
fi
rst 4 telephones reco
g
nised are displa
y
ed in this window.
A virtual ke
y
pad is displa
y
ed in the screen:
e
nter a co
d
e w
i
t
h
at
l
east
4
digi
ts.
C
on
fi
rm b
y
pressin
g
O
K.
A messa
g
e that the pairin
g
has been success
f
ul appears in the
screen
.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list.
O
nl
y
one
te
l
ep
h
one can
b
e connecte
d
at a t
i
me.
A messa
g
e is displa
y
ed in the screen of the
te
l
ep
h
one c
h
osen.
T
o accept t
h
e pa
i
r
i
n
g
, enter t
h
e
s
ame code on the telephone, then con
fi
rm with
O
K.
The automatic connection authorised is onl
y
active after the
telephone has been con
fi
g
ured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed a
f
ter the
sy
nchronisation period.
(
Available accordin
g
to model and version
)
*
I
f
y
our telephone is
f
ull
y
compatible.
I
f
pairin
g
f
ails, the number o
f
attempts is not limited.
Go to www.peu
g
eot.co.uk for more information
(
compatibilit
y
, more
h
elp, ...
)
.
PAIRING A TELEPHONE / FIR
S
T CONNECTION
9
.7
4
06
RECEIVING A CALL
An incomin
g
call is announced b
y
a rin
g
and a superimposed
displa
y
in the vehicle's screen.
S
elect the YE
S
tab on the displa
y
usin
g
the buttons and confi rm b
y
p
ressin
g
O
K.
Press this button to acce
p
t the call.
MAKING A CALL
From the Bluetooth telephone
f
unction Audio menu, select Mana
g
e
the telephone call then
C
all,
C
all list or Director
y
.
Pr
ess
thi
s
bu
tt
o
n
fo
r m
o
r
e
th
a
n tw
o
seco
n
ds
fo
r
access to
y
our director
y
, then navi
g
ate with the
th
u
m
b
wh
ee
l.
O
r
T
o
di
a
l
a num
b
er, use
y
our te
l
ep
h
one
'
s
k
e
y
pa
d
,
wi
t
h
t
h
e ve
hi
c
l
e stat
i
onar
y
.
Durin
g
a call, press this button
f
or more than
2
seco
n
ds
.
Co
n
fi
rm with
O
K t
o
e
n
d
th
e
ca
ll.
BLUETOOTH
ENDING A CALL
9
.7
5
06
Initiate the pairin
g
between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairin
g
can be initiated from
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's ke
y
pad.
S
ee steps 1 to 9 on the
p
rev
i
ous pa
g
es.
D
ur
i
n
g
t
h
e pa
i
r
i
n
g
p
h
ase, t
h
e
vehicle must be stationary with the key in the
i
g
nition.
S
elect the telephone to be connected
f
rom the telephone
f
unction
menu
.
The audio s
y
stem connects to a newl
y
paired telephone
a
utomaticall
y
.
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING *
Wireless transmission o
f
the telephone's music
fi
les via the audio
e
quipment. The telephone must be able to mana
g
e the appropriate
Bluetooth profi les
(
Profi les A2DP / AVRCP
)
.
*
Depending on the compatibility o
f
the telephone.
**
In certain cases, pla
y
in
g
o
f
the Audio
fi
les must be initiated
f
rom the
ke
y
pad.
*** If the tele
p
hone su
pp
orts the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressin
g
the
SO
UR
C
E button
**
.
The tracks to be pla
y
ed can be
co
ntr
o
ll
ed
as
usua
l vi
a
th
e
bu
tt
o
n
s
o
n
the audio s
y
stem control panel and
the steerin
g
mounted controls *** .
Th
e
co
nt
e
xt
ua
l inf
o
rm
a
ti
o
n
ca
n
be
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
on t
h
e screen.
BLUETOOTH
9
.7
6
07
CONFIGURATION
Press the MEN
U
button.
Usin
g
the arrows, select
PER
SO
NALI
S
ATI
O
N
CO
NFI
GU
RATI
O
N.
Pr
ess
t
o
co
n
fi
rm th
e
se
l
ec
ti
o
n.
Usin
g
the arrows, select DISPLAY
CO
NFI
GU
RATI
O
N.
Pr
ess
t
o
co
n
fi
rm th
e
se
l
ec
ti
o
n.
Pr
ess
t
o
co
nfi rm th
e
se
l
ec
ti
o
n.
Usin
g
the arrows, select ADJUST
DATE AND TIME.
Adj
ust t
h
e sett
i
n
g
s one
by
one
c
on
fi
rming by pressing the
O
K
bu
tt
o
n. N
e
xt
se
l
ec
t th
e
O
K t
ab
o
n th
e
sc
r
ee
n th
e
n
co
n
fi
rm.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C
9
.7
7
08
13
TRIP COMPUTER
Each press o
f
the button, located at the end o
f
the
wiper stalk, displa
y
s the di
ff
erent trip computer
in
f
ormation in succession, dependin
g
on the screen.
- t
he
"
v
ehicle"
t
ab
w
i
t
h
:
● the ran
g
e, the current
f
uel consumption and the distance
remainin
g
to the destination,
- the "1" tab
(
trip 1
)
with:
● the avera
g
e speed, the avera
g
e consumption and the distance
travelled calculated over trip
"1
" ,
- the "2" tab
(
trip 2
)
with the same information for a second trip.
A FEW DEFINITIONS
Ran
g
e: displa
y
s the distance which can travelled with the remainin
g
fuel
detected in the tank, basd on the avera
g
e consumption over the last few
m
iles
(
kilometres
)
.
This displa
y
ed value ma
y
var
y
si
g
ni
fi
cantl
y
f
ollowin
g
a chan
g
e in the
vehicle speed or the relie
f
o
f
the route.
When the ran
g
e
f
alls below 20 miles
(
30 km
)
, dashes are displa
y
ed.
Af
ter
fi
llin
g
with at least 10 litres o
f
f
uel, the ran
g
e is recalculated and is
displa
y
ed when it exceeds 60 miles
(
100 km
)
.
If, whilst drivin
g
, dashes are displa
y
ed continuousl
y
in place of the di
g
its,
c
ontact a PE
UG
E
O
T dealer.
Current fuel consum
p
tion
:
on
ly
ca
l
cu
l
ate
d
an
d
di
sp
l
a
y
e
d
a
b
ove
20 mph
(
30 km
/
h
)
.
Avera
g
e fuel consumption
:
this is the avera
g
e
f
uel consumption since
the last tri
p
com
p
uter zero reset.
D
istance travelled
:
calculated since the last trip computer zero reset.
Di
stance rema
i
n
i
n
g
to t
h
e
d
est
i
nat
i
on
:
ca
l
cu
l
a
t
ed
with r
efe
r
e
n
ce
t
o
the
fi
nal destination, entered b
y
the user. I
f
g
uidance is activated, the
n
av
i
gat
i
on system ca
l
cu
l
ates
i
t as a current va
l
ue.
Avera
g
e speed
:
this is the avera
g
e speed calculated since the last trip
c
omputer zero reset
(
i
g
nition on
)
.
Z
e
r
o
r
ese
t
When the required trip is displa
y
ed, press the control for more than
tw
o
seco
n
ds
.
V
EHICLE DIAGNOSTICS
9
.7
8
09 SCREEN MENU MAP
RADIO-CD
MAIN FUNCTION
* The parameters var
y
accordin
g
to vehicle.
OPTION
A
OPTION B...
M
ONOCHROME
A
OPTION A
1
OPTION A2
REG MODE
CD REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
V
EHICLE CONFIG *
REV WIPE A
C
T
OPTIONS
GUIDE LAMPS
DIAGNO
S
TIC
S
RDS SEARCH
CONSUL
T
ABANDO
N
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
2
9
.7
9
09
TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS / °FAHRENHEIT
FUEL CON
S
UMPTION: KM/L -
L
/100 - MPG
1
2
2
SCREEN MENU MAP
DI
S
PLAY ADJU
S
T
MONTH
DATE
HOUR
MINUTES
YEAR
12 H/24 H MODE
LANGUAGE
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUES
PORTUGUES-BRASIL
FRANCAIS
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
ESPANOL
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
9
.
80
09
SCREEN MENU MAP
Press the
O
K dial for access to short-cut menus accordin
g
to the displa
y
o
n t
he
sc
r
ee
n:
M
ONOCHROME C
a
ctivate / deactivate RD
S
a
ctivate / deactivate REG mod
e
a
ctivate
/
deactivate radiotex
t
RADIO
a
ctivate / deactivate Intro
CD / MP3 CD
a
ctivate
/
deactivate track repeat
(
the
entire current CD for CD, the entire
c
urrent folder for MP3 CD
)
a
ctivate
/
deactivate random pla
y
(
the
entire current CD for CD, the entire
c
urrent folder for MP3 CD)
a
ctivate / deactivate track repeat
(
of the
c
urrent folder / artist /
g
enre / pla
y
list
)
USB
a
ctivate / deactivate random pla
y
(
of the
c
urrent folder / artist /
g
enre / pla
y
list
)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
.
81
09
SCREEN MENU MAP
MONOCHROME C
AUDIO FUNCTION
S
a
lternative frequencies
(
RDS
)
activate
/
deactivate
FM BAND PREFERENCE
S
r
e
g
ional mode
(
REG
)
activate
/
deactivate
r
adio-text information (RDTXT)
ac
tiv
a
t
e
/
deac
tiv
a
t
e
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
PLAY MODES
a
lbum repeat
(
RPT
)
activate
/
deactivate
track random play
(
RDM
)
activate
/
deactivate
2
3
4
3
4
TRIP COMPUTER
D
istance: x miles
ENTER DI
S
TANCE TO DE
S
TINATION
D
ia
g
nostic
s
A
LERT LOG
Functions activated or deactivated
S
TATU
S
OF THE FUNCTION
S
*
1
2
3
3
2
3
2
Pressin
g
the MENU button displa
y
s:
*
The parameters vary according to vehicle.
9
.
82
09
SCREEN MENU MAP
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
Connect/Disconnect a devic
e
C
onsult the paired device
BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION
T
elephone function
Audio Streamin
g
function
Delete a
p
aired device
P
e
r
fo
rm
a
Bl
ue
t
oo
th
sea
r
c
h
Calls lis
t
C
ALL
Di
rector
y
T
erminate the current call
MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL
Activate private mod
e
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
video bri
g
htness ad
j
ustmen
t
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *
PER
S
ONALI
S
ATION-CONFIGURATION
n
o
rm
al
v
ideo
i
nv
e
r
se
v
ideo
bri
g
htness
(
- +
)
ad
j
ustment
d
ate an
d
t
i
me a
dj
ustmen
t
day
/
month
/
year adjustment
hour
/
minute ad
j
ustment
c
h
o
i
ce
of
12 h
/
24 h m
ode
c
hoice of units
l/100 km - mp
g
- km/l
°
C
elsius
/
°Fahrenheit
CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
1
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
4
*
The parameters var
y
accordin
g
to vehicle
.
9
.
83
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q
UESTIO
N
A
N
S
WER
S
OLUTIO
N
Th
e
r
e
i
s
a
d
iff
e
r
e
n
ce
in
s
ound qualit
y
between the
d
iff
e
r
e
nt
aud
i
o
sou
r
ces
(
radio, CD...
)
.
For optimum sound qualit
y
, the audio settin
g
s
(
Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness
)
can be adapted to the different sound sources, which
ma
y
result in audible differences when chan
g
in
g
source
(
radio, CD...
)
.
Check that the audio settin
g
s
(
Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness
)
are adapted to the
s
ources listened to. It is advisable to set the A
U
DI
O
functions
(
Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, Left-
R
i
g
ht Balance
)
to the middle position, select the
musical
a
m
bie
n
ce
"No
n
e"
a
n
d
se
t t
he
loud
n
ess
c
orrection to the "Active" position in
C
D mode or to
the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
The CD is e
j
ected
automaticall
y
or is not
pl
a
y
e
d
by
t
h
e p
l
a
y
er.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unpla
y
able, does not contain an
y
audio
data or contains an audio format which the pla
y
er cannot pla
y
.
The CD is protected b
y
an anti-piratin
g
protection s
y
stem which is not
r
eco
g
n
i
se
d
by
t
h
e au
di
o equ
i
pment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the pla
y
er the
ri
g
ht wa
y
up.
-
C
heck the condition of the
C
D: the
C
D cannot
be pla
y
ed i
f
it is too dama
g
ed.
-
C
heck the content in the case o
f
a recorded
C
D: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's
C
D pla
y
er does not
pla
y
DVDs.
- Due to their qualit
y
level, certain writeable CDs
will not be pla
y
ed b
y
the audio s
y
stem.
The messa
g
e "U
S
B
p
eripheral error" is
displa
y
ed on the screen.
Th
e
Bl
ue
t
oo
th
co
nn
ec
ti
o
n
i
s
cu
t.
The batter
y
o
f
the peripheral ma
y
not be su
ffi
cientl
y
char
g
ed. Rechar
g
e the batter
y
o
f
the peripheral device.
The U
S
B memor
y
stick is not reco
g
nised.
The memor
y
stick ma
y
be corrupt.
Re
f
ormat the memor
y
stick.
The CD pla
y
er sound is
poor
.
The CD used is scratched or of poor qualit
y
. Insert
g
ood qualit
y
CDs and store them in suitable
co
n
di
t
io
n
s
.
The audio equipment settin
g
s
(
bass, treble, ambiences
)
are unsuitable.
S
et the treble or bass level to 0, without selectin
g
a
n
a
m
b
i
e
n
ce
.
9
.
84
Q
UESTIO
N
A
NSWER SOLUTIO
N
Th
e
s
t
o
r
ed
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
do
n
ot
f
unction
(
no sound,
8
7.5 Mhz is displa
y
ed...
)
.
An in
co
rr
ec
t w
a
v
eba
n
d
i
s
se
l
ec
t
ed
. Press the BAND A
S
T button to return to the
waveband
(
AM, FM1, FM2, FMA
S
T
)
on which the
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
a
r
e
s
t
o
r
ed
.
Th
e
tr
a
ffi
c
a
nn
ou
n
ce
m
e
nt
(
TA
)
is displa
y
ed. I do
n
ot receive an
y
tra
ffi
c
in
fo
rm
a
ti
o
n.
The radio station is not part of the re
g
ional traffi c information network. T
u
n
e
t
o
a
r
ad
i
o
s
t
a
ti
o
n whi
c
h
b
r
oadcas
t
s
tr
a
ffi
c
in
fo
rm
a
ti
o
n.
The qualit
y
o
f
reception o
f
th
e
r
ad
i
o
s
t
a
ti
o
n li
s
t
e
n
ed
to
g
raduall
y
deteriorates
o
r th
e
s
t
o
r
ed
s
t
a
ti
o
n
s
do
n
ot function
(
no sound,
8
7.5 Mhz is displa
y
ed...
)
.
The vehicle is too
f
ar
f
rom the transmitter used b
y
the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the
g
eo
g
raphical area throu
g
h which the vehicle is
travellin
g
.
A
ctivate the RD
S
f
unction to enable the s
y
stem to
c
heck whether there is a more
p
owerful transmitter
in the
g
eo
g
raphical area.
The environment
(
hills, buildin
g
s, tunnels, basement car parks...
)
block
r
eception, includin
g
in RD
S
mode.
Thi
s p
h
enomenon
i
s norma
l
an
d
d
oes not
i
n
di
cate
a
f
ailure o
f
the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been dama
g
ed
(f
or example when
g
oin
g
throu
g
h a car wash or into an under
g
round car park
)
.
Have the aerial checked b
y
a PEU
G
E
O
T dealer.
S
ound cut-outs of 1 to
2
seco
n
ds
in r
ad
i
o
m
ode
.
Durin
g
this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for an
y
frequenc
y
permittin
g
better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and alwa
y
s on the same route.
With the en
g
ine o
ff
, the
audio equipment switches
o
ff
a
ft
e
r
a
f
e
w min
u
t
es
o
f
use
.
When the en
g
ine is switched o
ff
, the audio equipment operatin
g
time
depends on the batter
y
char
g
e.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to econom
y
mode
a
nd switches off to prevent dischar
g
in
g
of the vehicle's batter
y
.
S
tart the vehicle's en
g
ine to increase the batter
y
c
har
g
e.
Th
e messa
g
e
"
t
h
e au
di
o
s
ystem is overheated"
appears on the displa
y
.
In order to protect the installation i
f
the surroundin
g
temperature is too hi
g
h,
the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection mode
l
eadin
g
to a reduction o
f
the volume or stoppin
g
o
f
the pla
y
in
g
o
f
the
C
D.
S
witch the audio s
y
stem o
ff
f
or a
f
ew minutes to
allow the system to cool.
15
1
Exterior
V
ISUAL SEARCH
1
0
EXTERIOR
Remote control 20-21
Changing the battery,
reinitialisation 21
Key 21
Starting 43
Central locking / unlocking 20, 24
Locking / unlocking
the load space 20, 24
Alarm 22-23
Fuel cut-off, Diesel priming 117-118
Wiper blades 139
Door mirrors 81
Side repeater 131
Front lamps, foglamps, direction
indicators 45-47
Headlamp beam height adjustment 47
Changing front bulbs 129-131
Headlamp wash 48, 112
Snow shield 127
Front doors 24
Sliding side door 25
Key 21
Opening the bonnet 108
Filler cap, fuel tank 116-117
Towbar 104-105
Rear parking sensors 85
Van dimensions 142-145
Doors, tailgate 24-26
Emergency control 26
Number plate lamp 133
Spare wheel, jack,
changing a wheel, tools 123-127
Infl ation, pressures 150
Towing, lifting 140-141
Rear lamps,
direction indicators 45-46, 132
3rd brake lamp 133
Changing rear bulbs 129, 132
Load space 20, 24
Accessories 106-107
Roof bars 106
Temporary puncture repair kit 121-122
Platform cab dimensions 146-147
Brakes, pads 84, 111, 113
Emergency braking 86
ABS, EBFD 86
ASR, DSC 87
Tyre, pressure 150
Snow chains 128
Rear suspension 78-80
15
2
Instruments and controls
Headlamp beam height adjustment 47
Starter, ignition 44
Wiper controls 48-49
Automatic wiping 48
Screenwash / headlamp wash 48
Trip computer Section 9
Cruise control 50-52
Fixed speed limiter 52
Speed limiter 53-55
Steering mounted controls:
-
Peugeot Connect Navigation (RT6)
Section 9
-
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
Section 9
Lighting controls 45-47
Automatic illumination of headlamps 47
Foglamps 46
Daytime running lamps 46
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Opening the bonnet 109
Parking brake,
handbrake 84
Electric windows,
electric mirrors 81-83
Instrument panels, screens,
speedometers 27-28
Warning lamps, indicator lamps 29-34
Indicators, gauge 35, 37-38
Setting the time in the instrument panel 28
Dashboard lighting dimmer 38
Gear shift indicator 40
Steering wheel adjustment 44
Horn 86
15
3
Instruments and controls
V
ISUAL SEARCH
1
0
Screens, display Section 9
Setting the time in the screen Section 9
Rear view mirror 82
Toll cards, car park tickets 74
Courtesy lamps
74, 131
Warning lamp in the overhead storage unit
27
Heated seats
68
Right-hand side
dashboard fuses 134-135
Passenger's airbag deactivation 96
Controls
- central locking 20, 24
- load space locking 20, 24
- alarm 22-23
- parking sensors 85
- ASR, DSC 87
Technology on board Section 9
- Emergency or assistance call
- Peugeot Connect Navigation (RT6)
- Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
Gearbox 39, 41-43
Hazard warning lamps 84
Heating, ventilation
- manual ventilation 56-57
- air conditioning A/C 56
- air recirculation 57
Air conditioning with separate
adjustments 58-60
Demisting/defrosting 62-63
Additional heating 64-65
Cab fi ttings 71-73
- glove box,
- overhead storage,
- ashtray,
- sun visor,
- 12 volt socket,
- ticket holder,
- storage compartment.
154
Interior
Rear view mirror 82
Toll cards, car park tickets 74
Front courtesy lamp 74
Changing courtesy lamp bulbs 131
Rear suspension 78-80
Front, lateral airbags 93-96
Passenger's airbag deactivation 96
Parking brake, handbrake 84
Opening the bonnet 108
Battery, charging, starting 119
Passenger compartment fuses 134, 136
Front seats, adjustments,
head rests 67-68
2-seat front bench 69-70
Seat belts 90-91
Child seats 97-103
INTERIOR
Rear courtesy lamp 74
Changing courtesy
lamp bulbs 131
Accessories 106-107
Towing, towbar, converter's fuses 138
Platform cab fuses 138
Load space 76-77, 106
- stowing rings,
- load retainer,
- roof box,
- trim,
- 12 volt socket,
- ladder separation or partition,
- stowing rail support,
- internal rack.
Temporary puncture repair kit 121-122
Spare wheel, jack,
changing a wheel, tools 123-127
Technical data - Maintenance
V
ISUAL SEARCH
1
0
TE
C
HNI
C
AL DATA - MAINTENAN
C
E
Identifi cation markings,
serial number, paint code, tyres 150
Snow chains 128
Engine fuses 134, 137
Windscreen / headlamp wash, levels 112
Bulbs, lighting, changing bulbs 129-133
Opening the bonnet, stay 108
Warning lamps 29-34
Changing a wiper blade 139
Under the bonnet
- Diesel 109
- petrol 110
Fuel cut-off, Diesel priming 117-118
Van dimensions 142-145
Platform cab dimensions 146-147
Weights 148
Checks 113-114
- battery,
- gearbox,
- carbon/passenger compartment fi lter,
- oil fi lter,
- particle emission fi lter,
- parking brake,
- brake pads,
- brake drums, discs.
Emissions controls (EOBD) 36
Water bleeding, Diesel fi lter 112
Levels 111-112
- Diesel additive,
- dipstick,
- power steering fl uid,
- brake fl uid,
- coolant,
- screenwash and headlamp wash fl uid.
Towing, lifting 140-141
Towed loads 148
156
15
7
V
ISUAL SEARCH
1
0
PRECAUTIONS...
01-13
This handbook describes all of the
equipment available in the whole range.
Your vehicle will be fi tted with some of this
equipment described in this document,
depending on its trim level, version and the
specifi cation for the country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are
given without any obligation. Automobiles
PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the
technical specifications, equipment and
accessories without having to update the
current handbook.
This document is an integral part of your
vehicle. It should be passed on to the new
user in the event of sale or transfer.
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by
application of the provisions of the European
regulation (Directive 2000/53) relating
to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves
the objectives set by this regulation and
that recycled materials are used in the
manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of
this handbook is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
www.peu
g
eot.com
An
g
lais
AN. 1
3
EXP.064
0
